JP5779221B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine and the like. Specifically, the present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs a game for performing variable display of identification information .

  What is conventionally known as this type of gaming machine is, for example, provided with an effect device such as a variable display device for effecting a game, and in the game, the variable display result of the variable display device is a specific display result. There is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific condition is established.

  Some of these gaming machines have timekeeping functions such as a clock function and a calendar function, and change the display mode on the variable display device based on information such as the current time obtained by the timekeeping function. As an example of a gaming machine that manages such a current time, the current time is grasped by using a time measuring means consisting of an internal clock, the time is displayed on the effect display screen, and the remaining time until the game hall is closed. In response to this, there is one that changes the display content related to the time (Patent Document 1).

  In addition, in a gaming machine equipped with such a time measuring means, it is possible to identify a fraudulent activity by monitoring the power off / on time, and to prevent setting changes due to the fraudulent action, the time value of the time measuring means is used to turn off the power. There is one that stores time data in a storage unit that is backed up by a power source (Patent Document 2).

JP-A-2004-357726 (FIGS. 5 and 12, paragraph numbers 0066 to 0073, 0091 to 0094) JP-A-2005-192723 (paragraph numbers 0057 and 0058)

This onset bright object is to identifiable notified that the display mode of predetermined effect to be executed based on the time count value of the counting means allowing specifying the date and time are changed.

(1) A gaming machine for performing a game for performing variable display of identification information,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect device based on a command transmitted by the game control means,
The production control means includes
A real-time clock as a timekeeping means,
Display mode changing means for changing the display mode in the game effect when the data according to the timing of the timing unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notice effect execution means for executing a display aspect notice effect for notifying a change in the display form in the game effect by the display form change means,
The notice effect executing means executes the display mode notice effect at least when the variable display of the identification information is not executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that it is possible to specify that the display mode of the game effect is changed by executing the display mode notice effect.
(2) In the gaming machine of (1), the notice effect executing means can execute the display mode notice effect according to the state of the game effect.
(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the advance notice execution means executes the display form advance notice in a form in which the date and time when the display form is changed can be specified.
In addition, you may provide the following structures.
When an effect device for effecting a game (various display device 9, various lamps such as a decoration lamp 25, speaker 27) is provided and a specific condition is established in the game (when the variable display result becomes a jackpot display result) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Clocking means (time clock 353 in FIG. 5 etc.) for clocking time and date can be specified;
Production information that can specify the contents of a predetermined production (special demonstration display, variation display of decorative design using an almighty design) executed by the production device corresponding to the date and time specified by the time value of the time measuring means ( Effect content storage means (ROM 84) for storing special demo display, data such as process data for executing decorative display variation display using almighty design,
Corresponding to the date and time specified by the time value of the time measuring means, the time corresponding effect executing means for executing the predetermined effect by the effect device based on the effect information stored in the effect content storing means (FIG. 41). S7604, S7606 to S7609, S7660 to S7663 of FIG. 42, S1810 to S1812, S1816 to S1818, S1820 of FIG. 45, S825 to S828 of FIG. 48, S1851 to S1859 of FIG. 50, S1872 of FIG.
Operation means capable of performing a predetermined operation (operation button 120, clear switch 912
, Production switch 354),
Information regarding the execution date of the predetermined effect executed by the time-corresponding effect execution means and the date and time when the effect is executed (fixed execution condition information stored in the golden time setting data area of the ROM 359 and the golden time setting of the backup RAM 356) Disclosure that each of the setting execution condition information stored in the area includes information related to the execution time of the effect, the fixed execution condition information stored in the almighty symbol setting data area of the ROM 359, and the almighty symbol setting area of the backup RAM 356 Each of the set execution condition information is disclosed to include information indicating the date and time when the effect is executed) and information regarding the type of the effect (fixed execution condition information and backup stored in the golden time setting data area of the ROM 359) Disclosure that each of the setting execution condition information stored in the golden time setting area of AM 356 includes information indicating the type of effect, fixed execution condition information stored in the almighty symbol setting data area of ROM 359, and the almighty symbol of backup RAM 356 Each of the setting execution condition information stored in the setting area includes execution conditions including setting (rewriting data and initializing data) including execution conditions including information indicating the type of effect. The above operation is performed based on a production setting procedure (S925 to S928 in FIG. 30, S501 to S514 in FIG. 31, such as golden time setting procedure and almighty symbol setting procedure in FIG. Operation for setting the execution condition of the predetermined effect by means ( 21, an effect setting for setting execution conditions for the predetermined effect to be executed by the time corresponding effect executing means in response to the power-on operation, selection setting operation, and setting / ending operation in FIG. Means (S925 to S928 in FIG. 30, S501 to S514 in FIG. 31);
Volatile storage means, which is first execution condition information that can specify an execution condition of the predetermined effect set by the effect setting means (information of a time selected as a time for executing a special demonstration display) The first execution condition storage means (backup RAM 356) is stored (stored in the golden time setting area in FIG. 7B, stored in the almighty symbol setting area in FIG. 7B). When,
Second execution condition information (non-volatile storage means that can specify the execution condition of the predetermined effect set in advance (the information of the time set as the time for executing the special demonstration display, always the almighty) 7 (a fixed execution condition information such as date information set as a date for executing the variable display of decorative symbols using symbols) is stored (stored in the golden time setting data area of FIG. 7A). ) Second execution condition storage means (ROM 359) stored in the almighty symbol setting data area)
Power supply means (backup power supply circuit 355) for supplying power for operation to each of the time measuring means and the first execution condition storage means for a predetermined time even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Including
The time-corresponding effect execution means is provided for each of the first execution condition information stored in the first execution condition storage means and the second execution condition information stored in the second execution condition storage means. Based on the date and time specified by the time value of the time measuring means, the predetermined effect is executed (S7604, S7606 to S7609 in FIG. 41, S7660 to S7663 in FIG. 42, S1810 to S1812 in FIG. 45, S1816 to S1818, S1820, S825 to S828 in FIG. 48, S1851 to S1859 in FIG. 50, and S1872 in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the first execution condition information has disappeared due to the stop of the operation power supplied from the power supply means, And even if the first execution condition information stored in the first execution condition storage means disappears due to the disappearance of the first execution condition information due to human reasons, the predetermined second Since the execution condition information is stored in the non-volatile storage means, a predetermined effect corresponding to the date and time specified by the time value of the time measurement means can be executed based on the second execution condition information. It becomes like this. Further, since the execution condition of the predetermined effect includes information regarding the date and time when the effect is executed, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the information regarding the date and time when the effect is executed. Furthermore, since the execution condition of the predetermined effect includes information regarding the type of the effect, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the information regarding the type of effect.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a real-time clock. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a real-time clock. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the storage area of ROM provided in the lamp driver board | substrate. It is a front view of the gaming machine installation island showing a display example of a special demonstration display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the transmission path | route of the effect control command between a main board | substrate and an effect control board, and the transmission path | route of the date command from a date data output device to an effect control board. It is a top view which shows the external appearance structure of a date data output device. It is a figure which shows each representative example of an effect control command and a date command in a table format. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main process which the microcomputer for effect control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the INT interruption process performed by the microcomputer for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a backup power supply monitoring process. It is a display screen figure which shows a golden time setting screen. It is a display screen figure which shows an almighty symbol setting screen. It is a display screen figure which shows a stand information setting mode screen. It is a display screen figure which shows a date resetting screen. It is a display screen figure which shows a stand information initialization screen. It is a display screen figure which shows an operation day change setting mode screen. It is a flowchart which shows the operation procedure in hall | hole setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the operation procedure in stand information setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the operation procedure in working days change setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the hole setting process performed by an information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the stand information setting process performed by an information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an information setting process. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display when performing the above-mentioned information disappearance alert | report in a variable display apparatus by information disappearance management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an information disappearance management process. It is a flowchart which shows notification content setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notification content setting screen and an operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of notification production | presentation information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display process process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during demonstration display. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for jackpot symbol determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the process data for the decoration design variation selected according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the notification effect performed in a fluctuation | variation display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the variation display of the decoration symbol using the almighty symbol performed in a variation display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the variation display of the decoration symbol using the couple symbol performed in a variation display apparatus. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of notification production. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of the symbol change in a decoration symbol fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows a clock management process. It is a flowchart which shows the production control main processing which the microcomputer for production control performs when controlling so that the production | presentation aspect of notification production can be changed while setting notification production execution conditions. It is a flowchart which shows the notification content setting process in the case of controlling to change the production | presentation aspect of notification production while enabling it to set notification production execution conditions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the notification content setting screen and notification condition setting screen in the case of controlling to change the production | presentation aspect of notification production while enabling it to set notification production execution conditions. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in the case of controlling to change the production | presentation aspect of notification production while enabling it to set notification production execution conditions. It is a flowchart which shows the post-round process in the case of controlling so that the notification effect execution conditions can be set and the effect mode of the notification effect is changed. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end effect process in the case of controlling so that the notification effect execution conditions can be set and the effect mode of the notification effect is changed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the notification effect performed in the fluctuation | variation display apparatus in the case of controlling to change the production | presentation aspect of a notification effect while enabling it to set a notification effect execution condition. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting process in the case of performing a symbol change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a symbol change notice screen. It is a flowchart which shows the operation procedure of a date data output device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the variation display of the decoration symbol using the symbol sequence of 5 rows performed in the variation display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation | variation display of the decoration symbol performed in the fluctuation | variation display apparatus at the time of extending the symbol row | line | column to 5 rows and increasing the symbol number displayed on the symbol row | line | column per row | line to 3 symbols. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which the microcomputer for presentation control in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the operation start date setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice determination process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of changing the display mode in a fluctuation | variation display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting process when enabling a player to select a display mode from a plurality of prepared display modes. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting process when enabling a player to select a display mode from a plurality of prepared display modes. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting process when enabling a player to select a display mode from a plurality of prepared display modes. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting process when enabling a player to select a display mode from a plurality of prepared display modes. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting process when enabling a player to select a display mode from a plurality of prepared display modes. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process in the case of enabling a player to select a display mode from among a plurality of prepared display modes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus at the time of enabling a player to select a display mode from the display modes prepared in multiple numbers. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus at the time of enabling a player to select a display mode from the display modes prepared in multiple numbers. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate in the case of using a some control means, a sound / lamp control board, and a symbol control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production | presentation selection table according to operation period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect selection table classified by day of the week. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a project execution information table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a project notice information table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notification information table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus in the case of performing notification effect according to a notification information table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a special effect information table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus in the case of performing a special effect according to a special effect information table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation | variation display apparatus in the case of performing a special effect according to a special effect information table. It is a flowchart which shows the backup power supply monitoring process by 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the information setting process by 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the information setting process by 6th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be a coin gaming machine or other gaming machines such as a slot machine. Any gaming machine may be used as long as the gaming machine has a device and is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a specific condition is established in the game.

[First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front, and FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game board.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a game hall (game shop). A plurality of gaming machine installation islands in which a plurality of gaming machines are arranged side by side are provided in the game hall, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on such a gaming machine installation island. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in a game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. Further, an operation button 120 is provided above the hitting operation handle 5 for the player to operate during the game. The operation button 120 is a push button type push switch, and is a momentary switch that is turned on when pressed with a hand and turned off when released. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7 includes a plurality of variable display areas, each of which displays a decorative design for presentation in a variable manner (also referred to as variable display or update display). A variation display device 9 is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative designs for presentations that can be identified based on the winning of the mouth 14) and for deriving and displaying the display results. In this embodiment, the variable display device 9 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and is configured such that decorative symbols are displayed and controlled in three display areas (decorative symbol display areas) of left, middle, and right. Yes. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined variation time has elapsed since the symbol variation display is started (except for the temporary stop before the so-called re-variation).

  In this embodiment, the symbols of numbers “0” to “9” are used as the decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9. During the decorative pattern variation display (variation), “0” to “9” decorative symbols are displayed in numerical order.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the top of the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers “0” to “99”, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display numbers such as “0” to “9” which are simplified. Since the display portion of the special symbol display 8 is small, the variation display mode and the display result of the variation display are difficult to see compared with the variation display device 9, so the player mainly pays attention to the variation display device 9.

  The variation display device 9 performs a variation display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variation display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variation display device 9 that performs variation display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the effect control board. The special symbol display 8 for displaying the variation of the special symbol is controlled by a game control microcomputer 560 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the game control board.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the variable display device 9 uses a liquid crystal display device will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display device 9 may be a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) or FED (Field Emission Display). ), PDP (Plasma Display Panel), dot matrix, LED (Light Emitting Diode) such as 7-segment LED, electroluminescence, and other image display type display devices such as a fluorescent display tube. The fluctuation display device 9 may be a mechanical display device such as a rotary drum display device.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, a special symbol hold comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered into the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). A storage indicator 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Then, every time the variable display of the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In this example, since the special symbol display 8 and the special symbol hold memory display 18 are provided separately, the number of hold memories can be displayed even during the variable display. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the variable display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15 having a start winning port 14 is provided. The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is provided with a pair of left and right movable pieces in such a manner that it can be opened and closed. The movable piece of the variable winning ball device 15 is driven by the solenoid 16 to be in an open state for a predetermined period when an opening condition described later is satisfied. When the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), and the player is in an advantageous state (first state). . On the other hand, when the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (it is difficult to start winning), which is disadvantageous for the player (second state). It becomes. The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a.

  A specific occurrence that occurs when a specific display result (a jackpot symbol: for example, symbols “00” to “99” other than “-”) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 8 below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 using an opening / closing plate 20a that is opened and closed by a solenoid 21 in a gaming state (a big hit gaming state) is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided with a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing plate 20a. In the big hit game state, the open / close plate 20a is controlled to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player, and the big hit In a state other than the gaming state, the open / close plate is controlled to a closed state (second state) that is disadvantageous to the player. As described above, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 satisfies the release condition when it enters the big hit gaming state. Of the winning balls that are won in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 and guided to the back of the game board 6, the winning ball that has entered one (V winning area: special area) is detected by the V winning switch 22 and then counted by the count switch 23. The game ball that has been detected and entered the other region is detected by the count switch 23 as it is. On the back of the game board 6, a solenoid 21A for switching the path in the special winning opening is also provided.

  In the case of the present embodiment, multiple types of big hits are provided as big hits. The big hit is usually a big hit, a probabilistic big hit, and a sudden probable big hit. In addition, in addition to big hits, small wins are included in the hits that result in a specific gaming state according to the display result of the special symbol. It should be noted that, among the big hits, different symbols may be displayed on the special symbol display 8 depending on whether the probability big hit or the normal big hit. For example, the special symbol display 8 displays the symbols “40” to “79” when the probability big hit, and the special symbol display 8 displays the symbols “00” to “39” when the big hit is normal. It may be. In addition, the same symbol may be displayed on the special symbol display 8 at the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit. For example, the symbols “00” to “79” may be displayed on the special symbol display 8 regardless of whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit. Further, the same symbol (for example, “80” to “99”) may be displayed on the special symbol display 8 for sudden probability big hit and small hit, or different symbols may be displayed. Also good.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided directly above the fluctuation display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When a game ball wins the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized at the time of lighting) are alternately turned on to perform the variable display. For example, if the left lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an outlet 26 for receiving a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided below. In addition, speakers 27 as two sound output devices that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c made of LEDs are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In this example, a prize ball lamp 51 is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b. The prize ball lamp 51 is an LED that is lit while paying out a prize ball. The LED that is lit when the supply ball is cut near the right frame lamp 28c. A ball break lamp 52 is provided. Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as “card unit”) 50 that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various light emitting means such as a prize ball lamp 51, a ball break lamp 52, a decoration lamp 25, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are controlled to be lit (lamp control) by a lamp driver board 35 described later. . Further, sound generation control (sound control) from the speaker 27 is performed by an audio output board 70 described later.

  The card unit 50 includes, for example, a usable display lamp that indicates whether or not the card unit 50 is in a usable state, a connected table direction indicator that indicates which side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the card unit 50, and a card. Check the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card has been inserted into the unit 50, the card insertion slot into which a card as a recording medium is inserted, and the mechanism of the card reader / writer provided on the back of the card insertion slot. A card unit lock is provided for releasing the card unit 50 in the case of doing so.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 5, and using the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball to the game area 7 (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. If the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol indicator is displayed if the variation display of the special symbol can be started (for example, end of the big hit game or end of the previous variation display) In 8, the special symbol variation display (variation) is started, and in the variation display device 9, the decorative symbol variation display is started. If the special symbol variation display cannot be started, the reserved memory number for the special symbol storage memory indicator 18 is increased by one.

  The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol of the variation display device 9 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot game state. That is, the game state shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to a normal state other than the big hit game state. In the specific game state (big hit game state), the special variable prize-winning device is used until a predetermined time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big prize opening. Opened. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is from when the special variable winning device is opened until a certain period of time elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, the big hit gaming state is continued for 15 rounds.

  The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the variation display device 9 are synchronized. Here, “synchronization” means that the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the special symbol display 8 stops the jackpot symbol (for example, symbols “00” to “99” other than “-”), the left, right and right decorative symbols are aligned on the variable display device 9. (For example, “222” or “777”) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, the fact that the left and right decorative symbols are aligned and displayed on the variable display device 9 is expressed as a big hit symbol (specific display result) of the decorative symbols being displayed.

  When the variable display device 9 is stopped and displayed in the state where the odd left and right decorative symbols (“1” “3” “5” “7” “9”) are aligned (for example, “777”), the big hit game When the jackpot game state ends, the probability change state (probability fluctuation) as a special gaming state advantageous to the player who judges the jackpot with a higher probability (ratio) than the normal gaming state when the jackpot determination is made It is a state, also called a high probability state). That is, when the display result of the variable display device 9 becomes a special display result of the display results of the jackpot symbol, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probable change state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined that the probability is changed internally, and when the symbol change symbol is stopped as a stop symbol at the end of the decorative symbol variation display as described above (an odd number of symbols in the middle left and right are aligned) When the display is stopped and the decoration symbol is “123” or “357”, the transition is made to a certain change state as a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  As described above, among the decorative symbols “0” to “9”, an odd number of decorative symbols that cause a probability variation state is referred to as a probability variation symbol, and an even number of decorative symbols that do not cause a probability variation state is referred to as a non-probability variation symbol. . Further, the fact that the variable display device 9 is stopped and displayed in a state where the left, middle and right odd-numbered decorative symbols are aligned is expressed such that the probability variation symbol (special display result) of the decorative symbol is displayed.

  In this embodiment, when it is predetermined to make a probable big hit, control is performed so as to shift to a high probability state and to shift to a short time state in which the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened. In that case, it is only necessary to set a time reduction flag separately from the probability change flag and reduce the variation time based on the time reduction flag. In addition, when it is determined in advance that a sudden probability change big hit will be made, control is performed so that only the transition to the high probability state is performed, and the transition to the short time state is not performed. In addition, when changing the gaming state to the probable state, simply changing to a high probability state in which the probability that a special symbol or decorative symbol will be a big hit symbol is increased, the probability that a normal symbol will be a winning symbol, or a variable prize The probability that a normal symbol becomes a winning symbol without changing the state of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 and the change in the state of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15 are set to the short time state (the short time flag is set). It is only necessary to execute the control based on the fact that the controlled state is controlled.

  For example, in the case of a probabilistic big hit excluding a normal big hit or a sudden probable big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, the special symbol display device 8 and the variable display device 9). The transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display in (is easily established). In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened or the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased as compared to the case where the high base state is not set. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time-short state where the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the special symbol time-short state where the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or decorative symbol is shortened. In the special symbol short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is accelerated). As a result, it becomes easier to win a start (transition to a high base state), and the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state).

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. In this embodiment, the reach display mode (reach) means that the decorative symbols that have not been stopped when the stopped decorative symbols constitute a part of the jackpot symbol are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). And all or part of the decorative symbols are in a state of being variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that becomes a part of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions among the left, middle, and right display regions in the variable display device 9. The display area of the display area is still in a variable display state, and all or a part of the display area is in a variable display while forming all or a part of the jackpot symbol (for example, a variable display) The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the device 9, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the fluctuation display device 9 are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decorative design etc.)) or a background display mode (for example, color) of the variable display device 9 is displayed. May be changed.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are a variable display control unit 49 including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer for controlling the variable display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, and the like. Various boards such as a mounted game control board (main board) 31, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control are mounted are installed. ing.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91A on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted. Although most of the power supply substrate 910 overlaps with the main substrate 31, there is an exposed portion that is exposed so as to be visible from the outside without overlapping the main substrate 31. The exposed portion is provided on the main board 31 and each electrical component control board (production control board 80, payout control board 37, audio output board 70, and lamp driver board 35) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power switch 911 as a power supply permission means for executing or shutting off power supply to each of the electric components (components that operate when power is supplied), and a microcomputer such as a game control microcomputer A clear switch 912 for instructing to clear the stored information in the RAM is provided. The clear switch 912 is a push button type push switch, and is a momentary switch that is turned on when the hand is pressed and turned off when the hand is released. Each of the power switch 911 and the clear switch 912 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it can be operated by a store clerk in the game hall, but the player cannot operate it. is there. A replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch 911 in the exposed portion (on the inside of the board).

  In addition, the lamp driver board 35 is provided with an effect switch 354 for setting various types of information such as information relating to effects as described later. The effect switch 354 is a push button type push switch, and is a momentary switch that is turned on when pressed with a hand and turned off when released. Since such an effect switch 354 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it can be operated by a store clerk in the game hall, but cannot be operated by the player.

  An electrical component control means including an electrical component control microcomputer is mounted on the electrical component control board. The electrical component control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, variable display device 9, lamp) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. And light emitters such as LEDs, speakers 27, etc.). Hereinafter, description may be made by including the main board 31 in the electric component control board. In that case, the electrical component control means mounted on the electrical component control board includes a game control means and means for controlling the electrical components provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal from the game control means and the like. Each of them. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate.

  On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 160 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. The terminal board 160 includes at least a ball break terminal for introducing the output of the ball break detection switch 167 and outputting it externally, a prize ball terminal for outputting prize ball information (prize ball number signal) and a ball. A ball lending terminal for externally outputting lending information (ball lending number signal) is provided. Near the center, an information terminal board (information output board) 36 provided with terminals for outputting various information from the main board 31 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

  The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through a guide rail (not shown), and reaches a ball payout device covered with a payout case 40A through a curve rod. A ball break switch 187 as a game medium break detection means is provided on the upper part of the ball payout device. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail (in the storage tank 38). (Proximate part). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning prizes or game balls based on ball lending requests are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 becomes full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch (not shown) as a storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as a storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board 31. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an interface board 66, a relay board 77, and an effect control board 80 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 31 has a basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a program, a gate switch 32a, a start port switch 14a, a count switch 23, and winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a. , 39a to the basic circuit 53, an input driver circuit 58, a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and a solenoid for switching the path in the big prize opening An output circuit 59 for driving 21A in accordance with a command from the basic circuit 53 is mounted.

  Note that the switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a may be referred to as sensors. That is, the name of the game medium detection means is not limited as long as it is a game medium detection means (game ball detection means in this example) that can detect a game ball. Each of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a for detecting the winning is also a winning detecting means for detecting the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Even if a pass gate such as the gate 32 is used, a game ball enters the pass gate if the prize ball is paid out, and a switch (for example, a switch provided in the pass gate (for example, The gate switch 32a) becomes a winning detection means.

  The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means (variation data storage means for storing fluctuation data) used as a work memory, and a control operation according to the program. A game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 for performing In this embodiment, the CPU 56 refers to a central processing unit (a part excluding the storage means such as the ROM 54 and the RAM 55, the I / O port unit 57, etc.) of the basic circuit 53 that operates according to the program. Main processing and interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) described later are executed. The game control microcomputer 560 refers to a part of the basic circuit 53 including the CPU 56, storage means such as the ROM 54 and RAM 55, the I / O port unit 57, and the like. And transmission / reception of various data to / from the microcomputer mounted on the production control board 80).

  In this embodiment, the ROM 54, the RAM 55 serving as storage means as a work memory, and the I / O port unit 57 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 is specifically executed (or performs processing) hereinafter. The CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a volatile storage unit, and is a backup RAM that functions as a non-volatile storage unit because part or all of the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 detects the backup power supply voltage, and when the detected voltage value continues below for a predetermined time and falls below a certain value, the fact that the power has been reduced is displayed on the variable display device 9 or a sound or lamp is displayed. You may provide the alerting | reporting means to alert | report. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, for example, or a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination. In short, the backup power supply may be any power supply that can supply power so as to be able to store information related to gaming state such as information related to jackpots and information related to probability change during an instantaneous power failure or power failure.

  A reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The reset signal from the power supply board 910 is also input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer become operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer stop operating. It becomes a state. Therefore, during the period in which the reset signal is at a high level, an allowance signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output, and during the period in which the reset signal is at a low level, An operation stop signal for stopping the operations of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output. A reset circuit may be mounted on each control board (including the main board 31), or a reset circuit is mounted on one or more of the plurality of control boards, and a reset signal is sent from there to another control circuit. You may make it supply to a board | substrate.

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 910 has decreased to a predetermined value or less is input to the input port of the basic circuit 53 via the payout control board 37. Further, a clear signal indicating that the above-described clear switch 912 for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM of the microcomputer such as the game control microcomputer 560 is input to the input port of the basic circuit 53. Is done.

  The clear signal is branched at the main board 31 and is also supplied to the effect control board 80. Note that the state of the clear signal input by the game control microcomputer 560 via the input port may be output to the effect control board 80 via the output port.

  The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an effect control command (effect control signal) as a control signal for instructing effect control including display control, sound control, and lamp control to the effect control board 80. The effect control board 80 receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 and performs an effect control microcomputer (see FIG. 9) that performs display control on the variable display device 9. Electrical component control means is mounted. Between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, eight signal lines and an effect control INT signal as a strobe signal are used as parallel signal lines for transmitting an effect control command as an effect control signal as a parallel signal. Is provided with one signal line.

  In this embodiment, effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer and various processing circuits) mounted on the effect control board 80 and the like is provided from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control command is received, and the display control of the variable display device 9 that displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner is performed. Further, the effect control means performs sound output control of the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70, and performs display control of each lamp 25, 28 a, 28 b, 28 c via the lamp driver board 35. In this embodiment, “effect control” means display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c, thereby providing a game effect. It means performing such as. In this embodiment, the effect control means includes an effect control microcomputer 100 that performs display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. This is realized by various processing circuits (for example, a real-time clock 353, a backup power supply circuit 355, and a speech synthesis IC 703 described later).

  The effect control microcomputer responds to the effect control command, in addition to control related to various display effects such as variable display of the variable display device 9, a prize ball lamp 51, a ball break lamp 52, a decoration lamp 25, and a ceiling lamp. Control relating to various effects including control of 28a, left frame lamp 28b and right frame lamp 28c (lamp control) and game sound generation control (sound control) using the speaker 27 is performed. The effect control board 80 is, for example, a processing device having a display control function for performing image display and a high-speed drawing function in addition to the effect control microcomputer, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) for performing display control of the variable display device 9. ), A character ROM for storing image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 in advance, and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) for expanding the image data generated by the VDP. The detailed configuration of the effect control board 80 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an effect control board 80 for performing display control of the variable display device 9 and an audio output board 70 for performing sound output control of the speaker 27. And a lamp driver board 35 for performing display control of each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. In this embodiment, a plurality of control boards (production control board 80, audio output board 70, lamp driver board 35) are used to control display of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and each lamp. Although the case where display control of 25, 28a, 28b, 28c is performed will be described, it may be performed using one control board (for example, one production control board).

  The effect control board 80 includes a ROM 84 that stores a display control program and the like, a RAM 85 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 101 that is a processor that performs a display control operation in accordance with the program, and an I / O port 87. The RAM 85 may be externally attached. The effect control board 80 is, for example, a processing device having a display control function for performing image display and a high-speed drawing function in addition to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a VDP (Video Display) for performing display control of the variable display device 9. Processor) 88, a character ROM 89 for storing image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 in advance, and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 83 for expanding the image data generated by the VDP 88. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100 and maps the VRAM 83 therein. The VRAM 83 is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP 109. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM 83 to the variable display device 9.

  The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an effect control command and an effect control INT signal as control signals for instructing effect control including display control, sound control, and lamp control to the effect control board 80. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM 84 and responds to an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. The presentation control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 reads necessary data from the character ROM 89 in accordance with the received production control command. The character ROM 89 stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs) in advance. It is a storage means. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs the data read from the character ROM 89 to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 performs display control of the variable display device 9 based on the data input from the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 5 illustrates a diode as a unidirectional circuit. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  In addition, as a signal line for transmitting the effect control command, a configuration using one signal line, that is, a serial signal line is adopted instead of the configuration using the parallel signal lines such as the above-mentioned eight. Also good. When the serial signal line is used, the production control command is serial data, the start bit of the low level signal is transmitted before the transmission of the serial data, and the stop bit of the high level signal is transmitted after the transmission of the serial data. Since the start control command capture timing is indicated by such a start bit and stop bit, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives serial data transmitted between the start bit and the stop bit as the effect control command. .

  The production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data for driving the speaker 27 to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104 to output sound. As a result, sound control is performed to output (synchronously) sound in response to the effect display on the variable display device 9.

  The audio output board 70 is a board on which an input / output driver 702, a voice synthesizing IC 703, an audio data ROM 704, an amplifier circuit 705, and a circuit for outputting audio such as a volume 706 are formed. The production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173 mounted on the speech output board 70 as a signal for driving the speaker 27. In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 173 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp (various light emitting means) to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 105. As a result, sound control is performed to output (synchronously) sound in response to the effect display on the variable display device 9. As described above, the sound control and the light emission control are performed by the microcomputer 100 for effect control in correspondence with (in synchronization with) the effect display on the variable display device 9.

  The lamp driver substrate 35 is a substrate on which circuits such as an input / output driver 351 and a lamp driver 352 are formed. In the lamp driver board 35, the lamp driver 352 receives signals for driving various lamps output from the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal and supplies it to various light emitting means such as a prize ball lamp 51, a ball-out lamp 52, a decoration lamp 25, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c. As a result, the various light emitting means are driven.

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the production control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver 352, and the speech synthesis IC 703, such that a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side. Communication).

  In addition, an operation signal (detection signal indicating an operation state) from the operation button 120 is input to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 108. Similarly, the clear signal from the power supply board 910 described above is input to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 108. The effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect based on an operation signal from the operation button 120, as will be described later. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 performs various setting processes based on operation signals from the operation buttons 120. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 sets notification contents to be notified to the player in the notification production based on the operation signal from the operation button 120, as will be described later. Instead of setting the notification content based on the operation signal from the operation button 120, the notification content may be set based on an on / off signal from the effect switch 354 provided on the lamp driver board 35.

  In this embodiment, the lamp driver board 35 includes a real-time clock (RTC) module (hereinafter referred to as a real-time clock) 353, an effect switch 354, a backup power supply circuit 355, a backup RAM 356, a ROM 359, a power supply monitoring circuit 357, and A data transfer controller 358 is mounted. Each of the real-time clock 353, the effect switch 354, the backup RAM 356, the ROM 359, and the power supply monitoring circuit 357 provided on the lamp driver board 35 and the effect control microcomputer 100 provided on the effect control board 80 includes a lamp driver board. 35 and an input / output driver 351 provided in 35 and an input / output port 105 provided in the effect control board 80.

  The real-time clock 353 measures time to indicate the current “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, “second”, and the time value (“year”, This is a device that outputs “a part or all of the count values of“ month ”,“ day ”,“ day of the week ”,“ hour ”,“ minute ”, and“ second ”).

  The time measured value of the real time clock 353 is stored in the backup RAM 356. The backup RAM 356 is storage means configured using, for example, SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) which is volatile storage means, and various information such as the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the time value of the real-time clock 353. Is memorized. The backup RAM 356 holds stored data based on the backup power supplied from the backup power supply circuit 355 even when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. The backup RAM 356 is connected to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the stored information is managed by the effect control microcomputer 100. The backup RAM 356 is connected to the real time clock 353 via the data transfer controller 358.

  The storage area of the backup RAM 356 includes an operation start date / time storage area for storing the operation start date / time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a date / time (“year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “ Various storage areas such as a time value data storage area for storing time value data as time information that can specify the time value (current time value) (hour, minute, second)) are provided. .

  The data transfer controller 358 reads the data of the time values (all time values from “year” to “second”) of the real-time clock 353 at a predetermined cycle (cycle shorter than 1 second), and transfers the data to the backup RAM 356. Then, the address of the timekeeping value storage area of the backup RAM 356 is designated, and the data is written in a manner to overwrite the data in the timekeeping value data storage area. As a result, the time value data stored in the time value data storage area of the backup RAM 356 is the same data as the time value data of the real-time clock 353. The data transfer controller 358 is configured by a circuit that transfers data directly from a real-time clock 353 to a memory without using a CPU, such as a DMA controller (Direct Memory Access), for example. The data transfer controller 358 may be configured by any circuit as long as it can transfer the time-measured data from the real-time clock 353 to the backup RAM 356.

  The various data stored in the storage area other than the timekeeping value data storage area of the backup RAM 356 is written by the production control microcomputer 100 at any time by designating the address of the writing destination. Are written in various storage areas.

  The production control microcomputer 100 reads the time data stored in the time value data storage area of the backup RAM 356 as necessary, and thereby reads the current date (year, month, day) measured by the real-time clock 353. Date information indicating the day of the week) and time information indicating the current time (hour, minute, second) are acquired, and various processes are executed based on the current date and time. In each of the real-time clock 353, the backup RAM 356, and the data transfer controller 358, the power switch 911 is in an ON state, such as during game hours (for example, 10:00 to 23:00). Thus, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied, the power supply power from the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated, and the power switch 911 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off during the closing time of the game hall. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not supplied, the power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 355 mounted on the lamp driver board 35.

  The backup power supply circuit 355 accumulates (charges) backup power by accumulating charges based on the power when the power supply power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied, for example, to the pachinko gaming machine 1 Even when the power source power is not supplied, the capacitor type charge / discharge circuit is configured to supply the stored power as backup power by discharging the stored charge. Therefore, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the real-time clock 353 can measure the current date and time, the data transfer controller 358 can transfer data, and the backup RAM 356 The current date and time measured by the real time clock 353 can be stored while being updated. The backup power supply circuit 355 can supply power for backup over a period of about four months, for example. Note that the backup power supply circuit 355 may be any circuit as long as it can supply power for backup during a continuous business holiday period generally assumed for amusement halls. Further, the backup power supply circuit 355 may be provided in a detachable manner or may be provided in a non-detachable manner. Further, the backup power supply circuit 355 is electrically connected to the real-time clock 353, the data transfer controller 358, and the backup RAM 356 only when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not supplied. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1, power is not supplied to the real-time clock 353, the data transfer controller 358, and the backup RAM 356. May be configured to be electrically disconnected from them.

  Further, the operation signal of the effect switch 354 is input to the effect control microcomputer 100. The power supply monitoring circuit 357 is a circuit that measures and monitors the voltage of the backup power supply circuit 356, and outputs a voltage drop signal to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the voltage drops below a predetermined value. The voltage drop signal may be set so as to be output when the output voltage of the backup power supply circuit 356 becomes 0V, or the data stored in the backup RAM 356 when the output voltage of the backup power supply circuit 356 is 0V or higher. May be set to a predetermined voltage as a voltage that cannot be backed up. When the voltage drop signal is input, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that there is no supply of backup power that can store the data stored in the backup RAM 356, and performs control as described later.

  The backup power supply circuit 355 is configured by a battery, and each of the real-time clock 353, the backup RAM 356, and the data transfer controller 358 is a backup power supply configured by a battery when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may make it operate | move with the power supply supplied from a circuit. Further, the backup power supply circuit 355 is configured by a battery, and each of the real-time clock 353, the backup RAM 356, and the data transfer controller 358 is configured by a battery even when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may make it operate | move with the power supply supplied from a backup power supply circuit. The battery used in these cases may be either a primary battery that cannot be charged or a secondary battery that can be charged. When a secondary battery is used as the backup power supply circuit 355, a secondary battery that can be charged based on power supply power in a state where the secondary battery is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a predetermined charger that is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 Any of the rechargeable secondary batteries can be used. That is, as the backup power supply circuit 355, any of various capacitors and batteries can be used as long as it is a means for supplying power for a predetermined time even when power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not supplied. Also good.

  In addition, each of the real-time clock 353, the backup RAM 356, and the data transfer controller 358 may be mounted on the effect control board 80 and the audio output board 70 instead of the lamp driver board 35. In addition, each of the real-time clock 353, the backup RAM 356, and the data transfer controller 358 may be mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect based on an operation signal from the operation button 120. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 performs various setting processes based on operation signals from the operation buttons 120. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 sets notification contents to be notified to the player in the notification production based on the operation signal from the operation button 120, as will be described later. Instead of setting the notification content based on the operation signal from the operation button 120, the notification content may be set based on an on / off signal from the effect switch 354 provided on the lamp driver board 35. Further, the effect switch 354 may be provided on the effect control board 80 or the sound output board 70. Further, the effect switch 354 is not limited to the momentary switch described above, but may be one that can be turned on / off on the switch side, such as a dip switch, a push lock switch, or a rotary switch.

  The ROM 359 stores various information such as execution conditions for various effects executed at a predetermined timing based on the time value of the real-time clock 353. Here, the performance execution condition refers to information used as a condition for performing the performance. For example, information regarding presence / absence of performance, information regarding the type of performance, and date and time (day, time) ) Information. It should be noted that the performance execution condition may be only information related to the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined performance, or any one or a combination of these three pieces of information.

  FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the storage areas of the ROM 359 and the backup RAM 356 provided on the lamp driver board 35. In FIG. 7, main storage areas in the ROM 359 and main storage areas in the backup RAM 356 are shown. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 359 is provided with a storage area for storing (storing) various data such as a golden time setting data area and an almighty symbol setting data area. The golden time setting data area is a fixed execution condition information (execution condition cannot be changed and fixed as an execution condition of an effect such as a time at which the effect is always executed) regarding a special demonstration display effect and a mission effect described later. This is an area for storing information for specifying an execution condition for executing the production. Specifically, the fixed execution condition information includes information regarding presence / absence of execution, information indicating the type of effect (information indicating the effect of the special demonstration display), and information regarding the effect of the special demonstration display. Contains information about the time at which the demonstration display effect is executed. The almighty symbol setting data area is an area for storing fixed execution condition information for a variable display of a special decorative symbol using an almighty symbol, which will be described later. Specifically, the fixed execution condition information includes information on whether or not a special decoration design using an almighty symbol is displayed, information on whether or not the performance is executed, and the type of production (variable display of a special decorative design using an almighty symbol Information indicating the production date) and information regarding the date and time when the production is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the backup RAM 356 stores various data such as the golden time setting area and the almighty symbol setting area in addition to the above-described time value data storage area and operation start date / time storage area. A storage area (stored) is provided. The golden time setting area stores setting execution condition information as an execution condition set for an effect set by an input such as a set time for executing the effect set by the input with respect to the effect of a special demonstration display and a mission effect to be described later. It is an area. Specifically, the setting execution condition information includes information regarding presence / absence of execution, information indicating the type of effect (information indicating the effect of the special demonstration display), and information regarding the effect of the special demonstration display. Contains information about the time at which the demonstration display effect is executed. The almighty symbol setting area is an area for storing setting execution condition information for a special decorative symbol variable display using an almighty symbol, which will be described later. Specifically, in the setting execution condition information, information on whether or not a special decoration pattern using an almighty pattern is displayed, information on the presence or absence of execution of the production, the type of production (variable display of a special decorative pattern using an almighty design Information indicating the production date) and information regarding the date and time when the production is executed.

  Next, the configuration of the real time clock 353 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the real time clock 353. The real time clock 353 is realized, for example, as a serial interface type real time clock module incorporating a crystal oscillator. As shown in FIG. 6, the real-time clock 353 includes a crystal oscillator 360, an output control unit 361, an interrupt control unit 362, a bus / interface circuit 363, a clock output / calendar function unit 364, a timer register 365, an alarm register 366, A control register 367 and a shift register 368 are included.

  The crystal oscillator (OSC) 360 outputs an oscillation signal having a predetermined oscillation frequency (for example, 32.768 kHz). The clock output / calendar function unit 364 has a function of outputting a clock signal based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. The clock output / calendar function unit 364 has a function of measuring the date and time based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. For example, the clock output / calendar function unit 364 includes a clock counter composed of a plurality of registers, and counts up the clock counter based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360 to obtain time (hour, minute, second). Time. Such a clock counter includes a second register that counts seconds, a minute register that counts minutes, and a time register that counts hours. The minute register updates the count value by the carry of the second register (carry when 60 seconds elapse). The hour register updates the count value by the carry of the minute register (carry when 60 minutes have passed).

  Further, for example, the clock output / calendar function unit 364 includes a calendar counter constituted by a plurality of registers, and counts up the calendar counter based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360 to thereby set the date (year, month, Day). Such a calendar counter includes a day register for counting the day, a month register for counting the month, and a year register for counting the year. As described above, the day register updates the count value by the carry of the hour register (carry when 24 hours have elapsed). The month register updates the count value by the carry of the day register (carry when the last day of the month elapses). The year register updates the count value by the carry of the month register (carry by the end of the year). For example, the clock output / calendar function unit 364 includes a day of the week counter constituted by a register (day of the week register), and manages the day of the week by counting up the day of the week counter based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. Specifically, the day register updates the count value by the carry of the time register described above. As described above, the clock output / calendar function unit 364 has a function of measuring time by providing a register for counting time (year), month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second.

  The output control unit 361 has a function of outputting a clock signal (FOUT) having a preset frequency based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. For example, the output control unit 361 includes a frequency setting register, and presets the frequency in the frequency setting register based on an external input (FCON). Then, a clock signal (FOUT) is output based on the set frequency set in the frequency setting register.

  The interrupt control unit 362 has a function of outputting an interrupt signal (TIRQ) at predetermined intervals based on a set value (fixed period interrupt time) set in the timer register 365. The interrupt control unit 362 has a function of outputting an interrupt signal (AIRQ) as an alarm at a predetermined time based on a set value (alarm time) set in the alarm register 366.

  In this embodiment, the real-time clock 353 can be accessed from the outside when the inputs of the two enable signals (CE0, CE1) both become high level. For example, when the set value of each register of the real time clock 353 is set or when the time measured by the real time clock 353 is adjusted from the outside, the inputs of the two enable signals (CE0, CE1) are both set to high level Then, the access is permitted and a command is input from the outside.

  The shift register 368 is used when data is input to the clock output / calendar function unit 364, timer register 365, alarm register 366, and control register 367 from the outside of the real-time clock 353. These registers are used for serially transferring data at the time of data output when data is read out of the real time clock 353 from these registers.

  The shift register 368 bi-directionally transfers data between the bus / interface circuit 363 and each of the clock output / calendar function unit 364, the timer register 365, the alarm register 366, and the control register 367 via the data bus. To do.

  The bus / interface circuit 363 receives data for writing (input) (serial data) or data for reading (output) (serial data) from the production control microcomputer 100 (DATA1). ). Further, read (output) data (serial data) is input from the data transfer controller 358 to the bus / interface circuit 363 (DATA2). The bus / interface circuit 363 receives a clock signal (CLK) for data input / output operation from the production control microcomputer 100 or the data transfer controller 358, and at an operation timing set based on the clock signal. An operation for inputting data and an operation for outputting data are performed. The clock signal for data input / output operation is supplied from the production control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied, and operates with a backup power source when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not supplied. Data transfer controller 358.

  As data for writing, there are mode data for designating a data writing mode, address data for designating an address (register address) for writing data, and write data for writing to the address. It is serially input to the bus / interface circuit 363 from the production control microcomputer 100. The bus / interface circuit 363 monitors the input data, and when the mode data indicates the write mode, selects the address of the register specified by the address data, and sends the selected address to the selected address via the shift register 368. Control is performed to write the write data output to the bus.

  For such data writing, a person performs an operation for writing data with the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354, or a date / time command transmitted from the date / time data output device 300 (see FIG. 15) described later. Based on the reception of the production control microcomputer 100, the writing data can be given to the real time clock 353 from the production control microcomputer 100. Here, the date / time command is command data indicating a time value (year / month / day / day / hour / minute / second) synchronized with the time / date value measured by the date / time data output device 300. For example, as will be described later, the date / time command is a command (second command, minute command, hour command, day command, day command, day command, month command, data indicating each data of second, minute, hour, day of the week, day, month, year. Year command) is provided independently (see FIG. 14B described later). As a result, the production control microcomputer 100 can sequentially acquire data of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years in accordance with the type of received date / time command. As will be described later, the date and time counted by the date and time data output device 300 may be set to a date and time synchronized with the Japanese standard time, or may be set to an arbitrary date and time set by manual input.

  For example, when a second command is received as a date / time command, writing data for writing second data indicated by the second command to the second register is input from the production control microcomputer 100 to the real-time clock 353. . In this case, the write data includes mode data for designating a data write mode, address data for designating an address (second register address) for writing the data, and write for writing to the address. Data (second data indicated by the second command). When such write data is input, the bus / interface circuit 363 selects the address of the register (second register address) specified by the input address data, and writes to the selected address. Control of writing data (second data indicated by the second command) can be performed. Thus, the second value is set by rewriting the count value of the second register to the second data indicated by the second command.

  Also, as the date and time command, when the minute command other than the second command, hour command, day of the week command, day command, month command, and year command are received, respectively, as when the second command is received, Data input / output request signal and the data (minute data, hour data, day data, day data, month data, or year data) indicated by the received date / time command are displayed in the corresponding registers (minute register, hour register, day register). , Date register, month register, or year register) is input from the production control microcomputer 100 to the real-time clock 353. In this case, the data for writing includes the mode data for designating the data writing mode and the address (minute register, hour register, day register, day register, month register, or year register) at which the data is written. Address data specifying the address), write data to be written to the address (minute data indicated by the minute command, hour data indicated by the hour command, day data indicated by the day command, day data indicated by the day command, and month command Month data or year data indicated by the year command). When such write data is input, the bus / interface circuit 363 causes the register address (minute register, hour register, day register, day register, month register, or month register specified by the input address data) , Year register address) is selected, and write data is written to the selected address. Thus, the date data is set by rewriting the count value of the designated register.

  As the data for reading, the mode data for designating the data reading mode and the address data for designating the address (register address) for reading the data are serially transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the real time clock 353. Is input. The mode data of the data for reading in this case specifies whether the output destination of the read data is the production control microcomputer 100 or the data transfer controller 358.

  The bus / interface circuit 363 monitors the read data input to the real-time clock 353, and when the mode data indicates the read mode, selects the address of the register specified by the address data and stores it at the selected address. The read data is output to the bus, the read data is input to the bus / interface circuit 363 via the shift register 368, and the effect control microcomputer 100 or the data transfer controller 358 is serially transmitted from the bus / interface circuit 363. Control to output to. Whether to output the read data to the production control microcomputer 100 or the data transfer controller 358 is selected based on the output destination specified by the input read data. The bus / interface circuit 363 selects an output path (DATA1) for outputting data to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the output destination specified by the input read data is the effect control microcomputer 100. When the designated output destination is the data transfer controller 358, the output path (DATA2) for outputting data to the data transfer controller 358 is selected and the read data is output.

  For such data reading, the data input / output request signal and the reading data are automatically given to the real-time clock 353 when the production control microcomputer 100 is necessary for production control, and the data transfer controller. In order for 358 to transfer the data of the time measured value of the real-time clock 353 to the backup RAM 356 at a predetermined cycle, read data is automatically given to the real-time clock 353 at a predetermined cycle. In addition, such data is read based on an operation for reading data by the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354, and data for reading is given from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the real time clock 353. Can also be done.

  Here, the case where the data for reading is given to the real-time clock 353 based on the operation of reading data by the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 includes the following cases, for example. It is. When a person such as a game shop clerk wants to check the current time value of the real time clock 353, the time value data is transferred to the real time clock based on an operation for reading the data with the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354. It can be read from 353 and displayed on the variable display device 9. Further, when it is desired to check the values of various registers used to realize the above-described fixed-cycle timer interrupt function, alarm interrupt function, and clock output function, an operation for reading data by the setting operation unit 355 is performed. Based on this, the data of the time measurement value can be read from the real time clock 353 and displayed on the fluctuation display device 9.

  The clear signal described above may be input from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the transmission path of the effect control command. In the present embodiment, since the clear signal is input without going through the transmission path of the production control command, the date and time is sent from the date / time data output device 300 to the production control board 80 through the transmission path of the production control command as described above. Even when a command is input, a clear signal can be input to the effect control board 80, which is convenient.

  Next, a display example of a special demonstration display will be described. FIG. 8 is a front view of the gaming machine installation island 200 showing a display example of a special demonstration display. As shown in FIG. 8, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are arranged side by side on the gaming machine installation island 200.

  In the present embodiment, as an effect of performing a demonstration display as a customer waiting demonstration, an effect of a normal demonstration display that is executed when the current time is not a predetermined special demonstration execution time, and a current time is a predetermined special demonstration execution time There will be a special demonstration display that will only be performed when In the following, the demonstration display may be abbreviated as a demonstration display, and the special demonstration display may be abbreviated as a special demonstration display. As shown in FIG. 8, the special demonstration display is for a special demonstration display that is set in advance when the preset special demonstration display start time is reached in the variable display device 9 of each pachinko gaming machine 1. This is done by starting display of an image. The special demonstration display is continuously performed until a preset execution time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses.

  Further, when a special demonstration display is performed on each gaming machine installation island 200, the decoration lamp 25, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c of each pachinko gaming machine 1 have a predetermined light emission pattern. Can be turned on. The light emission pattern in the special demonstration display may be unique to the special demonstration display, or may be used in common with the light emission pattern used when other effects are performed. That is, any light emission pattern may be used as the light emission pattern in the special demonstration display as long as it can be identified as the special demonstration display. As such a light emission pattern, one that changes every unit time (for example, 1 second) is desirable, and one that is easy to compare every unit time is preferable. For example, as such a light emission pattern, any one of a light emission pattern in which a certain meter increases or decreases, a light emission pattern in which a color gradually changes, and a light emission pattern such as a clock that displays a simple time. Or any combination thereof.

  Note that the special demonstration display may be a control for outputting a predetermined sound in addition to the control for displaying the image and the light emission of the lamp as described above in the variable display device 9.

Since the special demonstration display is executed simultaneously in each pachinko gaming machine 1 when a preset time is reached, each game machine installation island 200 has each game when the preset time is reached. the simultaneous production to be performed in unison have you in the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the column set in the machine installation island 200.

  The control for performing such a special demonstration display is performed for each pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the time value of the real-time clock 353 provided in each pachinko gaming machine 1 and is therefore not started simultaneously (not executed synchronously). Time), it can be determined that there is a shift (inconsistency) in the time value of the real-time clock 353 between the pachinko gaming machines 1. Accordingly, for example, on the basis of performing such a special demonstration display outside the business hours of the game hall, the time value of the real-time clock 353 is shifted between the pachinko gaming machines 1 on each gaming machine installation island 200. If it is determined whether or not there is a deviation, the time value of the real-time clock 353 of each pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the date / time data using the date / time data output device 300 (FIG. 15), as will be described later. If the setting is reset on the basis of the above, it is possible to eliminate such a shift in the measured value. In addition, when it is determined that there is a deviation in the timekeeping value of the real-time clock 353 between the pachinko gaming machines 1 on each gaming machine installation island 200, the store clerk of the game hall manually controls each pachinko gaming machine 1 as described later. The time value of the real time clock 353 may be reset.

  In this way, if it is possible to eliminate the time difference of the real-time clock 353 in each pachinko gaming machine 1 installed on each gaming machine installation island 200, each gaming machine is installed within the business hours as described above. The simultaneous production performed on the island 200 can be performed synchronously in all the pachinko gaming machines 1 provided on each gaming machine installation island 200.

  In addition, by performing such a special demonstration display on each gaming machine installation island 200 during the business hours of the game hall, it is possible to improve the fun of the performance performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and to enhance the interest of the player. Can be improved.

  Further, instead of a special demonstration display, a special demonstration effect may be performed as a special demonstration in which an image such as a special demonstration display image is not displayed. As such a special demonstration effect, the decoration lamp 25, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c of each pachinko gaming machine 1 are turned on with a predetermined light emission pattern. The special demonstration effect may be performed using a lamp other than the decorative lamp 25, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. The special demonstration effect may be a control for outputting a predetermined sound in addition to the control for operating the lamp. In addition to the control for operating the lamp, the special demonstration effect is a control for displaying a predetermined image on the variable display device 9 (for example, during or without the variable display displayed on the variable display device 9 at that time). A control for superimposing and displaying a predetermined image for special demonstration effect on the image being displayed in a variable manner may be performed. In addition, the special demonstration effect may be one in which only control for displaying a predetermined image on the variable display device 9 is performed.

  By performing such a special demonstration effect on each gaming machine installation island 200 during the business hours of the game hall, the fun of the performance performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved, and the interest of the player is improved. be able to.

  In addition, during the period when the special demonstration performance is being executed, the control for increasing the appearance rate of the special reach, the control for increasing the appearance rate of the jackpot notice, A unique control such as executing any one or any combination of the types of control may be performed.

In addition, during the execution time of the special demonstration display, when the start prize is generated and the variable display is executed, the special demonstration display is ended, and an effect called a mission effect is performed as a special effect. Here, the mission effect will be described. Mission director has a mission period as an active period in advance a player, a predetermined effect (e.g., effect, etc. which revealed out of the specific character) informs (presented) and as benchmarks mission, informing the inside of the transmission period When the predetermined effect notified (presented) is executed, the game may be limited to a specific jackpot such as a predetermined jackpot gaming state (for example, the type of jackpot presented (probable jackpot or normal jackpot), This is a special performance controlled by any of the big hit gaming states regardless of the game. When the mission achievement condition is satisfied and the mission is achieved, the player is controlled in a state advantageous to the player such as a predetermined big hit.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. 9 and 10 are executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (S3). In S2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode that indicates the included address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (S4). By the process of S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and the PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state according to the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (S5). When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as a + 5V power source gradually reaches a specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of S5 (that is, By confirming that the power supply voltage is high, the CPU 56 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  If the power-off signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 checks again whether or not the power-off signal is in the off state after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (S80). To do. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  When the power-off signal is in the off state, software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the gaming device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch 912 is turned on (S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is OFF, a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set, and then the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch 912 is not turned on in S7, was the data protection process in the backup RAM area (for example, when the power supply stopped such as adding parity data) performed when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped? It is confirmed whether or not (S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined based on the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process depending on the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is merely an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of S10 to S14) that is executed when the power is turned on but not when the power supply is stopped is executed. To do.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S92). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is a portion where data indicating a number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (S93), and proceeds to S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, an out of ball flag, etc. Accordingly, an initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) ( S15). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display symbol random number update process (S17) and the initial value determination random number update process (S18). The CPU 56 disables the interrupt when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed (S16), and when the execution of the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process ends, the CPU 56 Is set to the permitted state (S19).

  The display symbol random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol indicator 8. In this embodiment, as the display symbol random number, there are a variation pattern determining random number for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, and a reach determination random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated. Used. The display symbol random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display symbol random number.

  The initial value determining random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number. A random number for determining the initial value is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, whether or not to generate a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or a hit based on a normal symbol) This is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a normal random number for determination per symbol). Game control processing described later (a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as a variable display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15 and a ball payout device 97 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1) In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game machine control process), when the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round, an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the interrupt is disabled. The display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are described later. This is to avoid contention with the process in the timer interrupt process because the process is also executed in the process (that is, the same process is also executed in S25 and S26 of the timer interrupt process). That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of S17 and S18 and the counter value for generating the display symbol random number and the initial value determining random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of S17 and S18.

  As described above, the game hall staff or the like starts power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 while turning on the clear switch 912 and outputting a clear signal (for example, turning on the power switch 911). The initialization process can be easily executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, during a period when interrupts are permitted during the execution of the loop process of S16 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of an interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) that detects whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) (S20). Next, detection signals from switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input through the switch circuit 58, and the state of these is determined (switches). Process: S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a display control process for outputting and clearing the DG signal to various displays such as the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator (S22). Next, the CPU 56 executes an abnormal winning notification process for notifying that an abnormal winning to the special winning opening has been detected (S23). Specifically, the count switch 23 is turned on in spite of the fact that it is before opening the special winning opening in the special symbol process process to be described later (specifically, at the stage of processing of S300 to S303 to be described later). If it is detected, control is performed to determine and notify that an abnormal winning in the special winning opening has been detected.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number used for game control is performed (random number update process: S24). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number (initial value determining random number updating process: S25). Furthermore, CPU56 performs the process which updates the count value of the counter for producing | generating a display symbol random number (display symbol random number update process: S26).

  When the random number update process, the initial value determination random number update process and the display symbol random number update process are performed, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, the normal symbol process is performed (S28). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting an effect control command related to a decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 and sending the effect control command (effect symbol command control process: S29). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variation display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer (S30). As will be described later, in the special symbol process, the special symbol process flag can take a value of “0” to “10”. Moreover, when the value of the special symbol process flag is “8” to “10” among these values, the process related to the small hit is executed. Therefore, when external information is output in the information output process, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the information is related to the small hit and output it as the small hit information. For example, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the current special symbol process flag is “8” or more. If it is “8” or more, the CPU 56 determines that the information is related to the small hit and outputs it as the small hit information. . Further, when the value of the special symbol process flag is “4” to “10”, a process for controlling the opening of the big winning opening (including the case of a big win and a case of a big hit) is executed. Therefore, when outputting external information in the information output process, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the information is information related to opening control of the big prize opening. For example, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the current special symbol process flag is “4” or more. If it is “4” or more, the CPU 56 determines that the information is related to the opening control of the special winning opening. Output information.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, etc. (S31). Specifically, a payout command command such as a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on turning on the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, etc. . The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a test terminal process that is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be confirmed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (S32). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 2 to the output port. (S33: Solenoid output processing). Then, the CPU 56 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storage (S34).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S35).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S36).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in the output buffer for setting the status display control data (S37). In this case, when the gaming state is a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 1 indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. Further, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the status indicator lamp 2 indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer.

  In this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting. In this embodiment, the processes of S21 to S37 (except S30 and S32) correspond to a game control process for controlling the progress of the game.

Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt permitted state (S38) and ends the process.
Next, the special symbol process (S27) in the main process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). In the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 is turned on if the start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the start winning port 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on, that is, a game. If a start winning that causes the ball to win the start winning opening 14 has occurred (S311), the start opening switch passing process (S312) is performed, and then any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state. Do. If the start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the start port switch passing process of S122, the numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 when the start port switch 14a is turned on (specifically, when the aforementioned random number read flag is set) is stored. Number (holding storage number) is checked whether it has reached the upper limit value (4), and if the storage number of numerical data stored in the holding storage buffer has not reached the upper limit value, the start winning storage number indicating the holding storage number Increase the count value of the counter by one. Then, a plurality of types of random number values (numerical data) as will be described later are extracted from predetermined numerical data updating means (random number circuit or random counter) and correspond to the extraction order of the reserved storage buffer (start winning memory) A process of storing in the storage area (corresponding to the value of the counter) is executed. A numerical value that becomes a random value when the start port switch 14a is turned on in this way and the number of stored numerical data (held storage data) in the storage buffer does not reach the upper limit value. The condition for extracting data is satisfied, and the condition for executing the variable display, that is, the variable display execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied. The determination as to whether or not the start port switch 14a is normally turned on is provided with a timer corresponding to the start port switch 14a for measuring the time during which the start port switch 14a is continuously turned on, When the timer value reaches a predetermined value, it may be determined that the start port switch 14a is in an on state.

  Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. The game control microcomputer 560 is in a state in which a condition for starting execution of the special symbol variation display is established (for example, the special symbol display unit 8 does not display the symbol variation display, and the special symbol display unit 8 displays the previous symbol variation display. It waits for a predetermined period of time to elapse after the symbol variation display is finished and a state where the game is not a big hit game. Then, when the condition for starting the variation display of the special symbol is established, the number of stored numerical data (holding stored data) stored in the holding storage buffer is checked. The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the hold storage number counter. Further, if the count value of the pending storage number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state, and whether or not the display result of the special symbol variation display is set as a specific display result (a big hit) Whether or not). A big hit flag is set for a specific display result. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The variation pattern of the special symbol variation display (corresponding to the variation time here), multiple types of variation predetermined according to the value of the variation pattern determination random number (one of the display symbol random numbers) extracted at the time of start winning Select from patterns. Further, in order to transmit information for instructing a variation pattern (a variation pattern command, that is, a variation display pattern command) to the production control microcomputer 100, the variation pattern command is set in the variation pattern buffer. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Special symbol variation processing (S302): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in S301 times out, that is, the value of the special symbol process timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed. Control is performed to shift to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S303): The special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is stopped, and a decorative symbol stop designation command for designating the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is transmitted. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to S304. Or, when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a small hit symbol, the internal state is updated so that (special symbol process flag) shifts to S308. Otherwise, the internal state is updated to shift to S300.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening is changed to one of a first state (open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player. In this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the big hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the big prize opening to the first state for a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). It is controlled so as to end by performing.

  Also, in this embodiment, so-called sudden probability change big hits (the big hits that give the player a special effect as if the game state has suddenly shifted to the probable change state rather than progressing sequentially in each round) May be transferred to. When the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly shifts to the probable big hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the winning prize opening for a period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) and the number of times less than the predetermined number of times (for example, twice). The game is terminated by changing to the first state in at least one of the above, and after the sudden probability change big hit game state, the probability that the special symbol stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol is improved from the normal state, and the game medium enters the start area Control is performed to a first high-probability state in which the ease of operation is the same as the normal state. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 has the same probability as the first high probability state that the special symbol stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state, and the game from the first high probability state to the start area You may make it control to the 2nd high probability state set so that a medium may approach easily. Note that the state where the game medium is set to be easy to enter the start area specifically means that the frequency at which the start winning opening 14 is opened is increased and the ease of winning the game ball is improved as compared to the normal state. It is a state (high base state). For example, the game state is controlled to the second high probability state by shifting to the high probability state and shifting to the short time state. In this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state of the normal probability change big hit (15 round probability change big hits other than the sudden probability change big hit) is finished, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol after the big hit gaming state ends. It is controlled to the second high probability state that is the same as the first high probability state and is set so that the game medium is more likely to enter the starting area than the first high probability state.

  Also, in this embodiment, the game is shifted to so-called small hits (a win that does not cause a change in the game state before and after the occurrence, opens the big prize opening only for a short time and performs a special performance). There is. When the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the small hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 has the same winning slot as the sudden probability change big hit game state (or the same period as the sudden probability change big hit game state and the same number of times as the sudden probability change big hit game state). Then, the game is ended by changing to the first state, and the game state immediately before the start of the small hit gaming state is controlled as the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state. In the small hit gaming state, the big prize opening may be suddenly changed to the first state for a different period or a different number of times from the probable big hit gaming state.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. More specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to open the big prize opening. Open. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) according to S305. It should be noted that the pre-winner opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting a round, the pre-opening pre-opening processing is also a process of starting a big hit game. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 realizes a specific game state transition control means by executing the pre-opening process for the big prize opening. Further, the specific game state transition control means may be defined as being realized by the effect control microcomputer 100 executing the jackpot display process. That is, the time point when the specific gaming state is started may be the time point when the effect for notifying the occurrence of the big hit is started. In this case, the specific time from the point of time when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result on the variable display device 9 corresponds to a period during which the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  Large winning opening opening process (S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state (display command during opening of a big prize opening) to the microcomputer 100 for the effect control, a process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. In addition, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to close the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the post-opening process for the special winning opening is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to S306.

  Post-winner opening process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A process for confirming whether or not there is a remaining round in the big hit gaming state is performed. If there is still a remaining round, a display command after opening the big prize opening designating display after the round in the big hit game (display of the interval between rounds) is transmitted, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S304. Update to transition to. When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) according to S307.

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S300 (in this example, 0).

  Pre-opening process for small hits (S308: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven. Then, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened to open the big winning opening, and the execution time of the small hit release process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set according to S309. It is updated to the value (in this example, 9.) Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, but when starting a round, the pre-opening process for small hits is a process for starting a small hit game. is there.

  Small hit release processing (S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. In addition, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to close the special winning opening. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) according to S310.

  Small hit end process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control to end the small hit gaming state. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S300 (in this example, 0).

  Next, the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process will be described. 13 and 14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) can start the variation of the special symbol (for example, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating S300). In the case) (S1501), the value of the number of start winning memories (the number of reserved memories) is confirmed (S1502). Specifically, the count value of the start winning storage counter is confirmed. The case where the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating S300 is a case where the symbol is not changed in the variable display device 9 and the game is not a big hit game.

  If it is not possible to start fluctuation in S1501, or if the number of reserved memories is 0 in S1502, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the demonstration display flag is set (S1503). The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that the presentation of the customer waiting demonstration display is being executed. If it is set, the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is. If not set, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a demonstration display flag (S1504), and transmits a demonstration display command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1505). In S1504, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a demonstration display command every time when the fluctuation cannot be started or when the number of reserved memories is 0, and displays the demonstration after counting for a certain time. A command may be transmitted.

  If the number of reserved memories is not 0 in S1502, each random number value (each random number for determination and display design random number) stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 is read and stored in the random number storage buffer area of the RAM 55. The contents are stored (S1506), the contents of each storage area are shifted (S1507), and the value of the reserved storage number is decreased by 1 (the value of the start winning storage counter is decreased by 1). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes. In other words, in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process of shifting the contents of each storage area each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

  Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect symbol command control process (S29) based on the update of the value of the start winning memory counter in S1507 (the value of the predetermined work area provided in the RAM is updated). The effect storage information designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the effect storage information 0 designation command when the updated number of reserved memories is 0, and when the updated number of reserved memories is 1, the effect storage information. 1 designation command is transmitted. When the number of reserved storage after update is 2, an effect storage information 2 designation command is transmitted. When the number of reserved storage after update is 3, the production storage information 3 designation command is transmitted. Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes jackpot determination processing (S1508 to S1511) for determining whether or not to win. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (S1508), and executes the jackpot determination module (S1509). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot if the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may use a software random number or a hardware random number output from the random number circuit as the big hit determination random number used for the big hit determination.

  When it is determined to be a big hit (Y in S1510), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a big hit flag (S1511). The big hit flag is a flag indicating that it has been decided to make a big hit.

  If it is determined not to be a big hit (N in S1510), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a small hit determination process (S1512 to S1515) for determining whether or not to make a small hit. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number from the random number storage buffer (S1512), and executes the small hit determination module (S1513). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is made when the big hit determination random number matches a predetermined small hit determination value. In this embodiment, a case where a common jackpot determination random number is used for the case of determining whether to win or not and a case of determining whether to win or not will be described. The microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not to make a small hit by using a small random number for determination only for small hits (random number for small hit determination).

  If it is determined to be a small hit (S1514), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag (S1515). It should be noted that the small hit flag is a flag indicating that it has been determined to be a small hit.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a special symbol information setting process (S1516 to S1532) for setting the jackpot symbol, the type of jackpot, and the jackpot symbol. The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S1516). If the jackpot flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special symbol stop symbol when the jackpot is determined and loads a jackpot symbol setting table for determining the type of jackpot (S1517). ). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out the special symbol stop symbol for determining the jackpot and the jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot type from the random number storage buffer (S1518). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the special symbol stop symbol and jackpot type based on the jackpot symbol setting table and the jackpot symbol random number (S1519).

  If the determined big hit type is a probable big hit (Y in S1520), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a probable big hit flag indicating that it has been determined to be a probable big hit (S1521), and sets the probable big hit. The designated effect designation value is set in the effect symbol information buffer (S1522).

  If the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot (N in S1520), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the determined jackpot type is a sudden probability variation jackpot (S1523). If it is a sudden probability change big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a sudden probability change big hit flag indicating that the sudden probability change big hit has been determined (S1524), and an effect designation value indicating the sudden probability change big hit is set. The effect symbol information buffer is set (S1525). If it is not suddenly a promising big hit, an effect designation value indicating a normal big hit is set in the effect symbol information buffer (S1526).

  If the big hit flag is not set in S1516, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S1527). If the small hit flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 loads a small hit symbol setting table for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the small hit flag is determined (S1528). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out the random number for the small hit symbol for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the small hit is determined from the random number storage buffer (S1529). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special symbol stop symbol based on the small hit symbol setting table and the small bonus symbol random number (S1530). Then, the effect designation value indicating the small hit is set in the effect symbol information buffer (S1531).

  If the small hit flag is not set in S1527, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an effect designation value indicating a loss in the effect symbol information buffer (S1532).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1533). In this case, for example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a normal state background designation command for designating the background display in the normal state as the background display designation command. Further, for example, when the gaming state is in a high probability state after a probable big hit, a high probability state background designation command for designating background display in the high probability state is transmitted as a background display designation command. Further, for example, when the gaming state is a high probability state after a sudden probability change big hit, a sudden probability change state background designation command is transmitted as a background display designation command. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value indicating the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S1534).

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is determined collectively using the jackpot symbol setting table and the jackpot symbol random number in S1519 has been described. However, the jackpot type is separately determined using different random numbers. You may make it decide to. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to make a probability change using a probability variation determination random number, and whether to suddenly change the probability using a probability variation determination random number separately from the probability variation determination random number. May be determined.

  The time measured value of the real-time clock 353 can be adjusted by using a date / time data output device (see FIG. 15), which is a device that can be connected from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a circuit (input port) inside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is possible.

  FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transmission path of the presentation control command between the main board 31 and the presentation control board 80 and the transmission path of the date / time command from the date / time data output device 300 to the presentation control board 80. is there.

  The effect control command has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  Between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, eight signal lines L1 to L8 and an effect control INT signal as a strobe signal are transmitted as parallel signal lines for transmitting effect control commands as parallel signals. One signal line L9 is provided. Parallel connectors (not shown) are provided at both ends of the signal lines L1 to L9. For the signal lines L1 to L9, a parallel connector on one end side is attached to a parallel connector 311 provided on the main board 31, and a parallel connector on the other end side is provided on the effect control board 80. By attaching to the parallel connector 801, the main board 31 and the effect control board 80 are connected via the relay board 77, and the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 are connected. Production control command communication is enabled. The connector 801 is connected to the input driver 102 shown in FIG. 5 (the detailed configuration of FIG. 5 is omitted in FIG. 15).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 receives effect control commands from the eight signal lines L1 to L8 for transmitting effect control commands at the capture timing indicated by the effect control INT signal from the signal line L9. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 analyzes the MODE data and the EXT data of the received effect control command, specifies that the received command is the effect control command, and specifies the effect content indicated by the effect control command. Then, in order to perform display control, sound control, and lamp control that should be performed in accordance with the content of the effect indicated by the effect control command, the display control of the variable display device 9 is performed, and the control signal of the speaker 27 and various lamps are controlled. The drive signal is output. In such a configuration, when effect control is performed based on the effect control command, sound control and lamp control are performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the display control of the variable display device 9. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control of the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command, and performs sound control and lamp control corresponding to the display control content, thereby allowing the variable display device 9 to perform the display control. Sound control and lamp control that match (synchronize with) the effect of display control are performed.

  The date / time data output device 300 is connected to the effect control board 80 and can adjust the time value of the real-time clock 353 based on sending a date / time command (date / time signal) indicating the date / time to the effect control board 80. is there. The effect control microcomputer 100 can receive the date / time command output from the date / time data output device 300 in the same manner as the effect control command. The date / time data output device 300 includes a real-time clock unit 302, a control unit 303, an operation unit 304, an information display unit 305, a status display unit 306, a 7-segment display unit 307, and a connector 301. Outputs a date / time command, which is command data indicating either the value (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) or the time / date value (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) manually set by the operator as date / time data. This device is used to synchronize the time measured value of the real-time clock 353 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a predetermined date and time including a standard date and time such as Japan standard time. Each of the real-time clock unit 302, the operation unit 304, the information display unit 305, the status display unit 306, and the 7-segment display unit 307 is connected to the control unit 303.

  The operation unit 304 includes operation means such as a switch provided for an operator to perform various operations such as operations necessary for outputting a date / time command to the outside. The real-time clock unit 302 uses a radio clock to automatically adjust the time value to the Japanese standard time, and the operator performs an adjustment operation to adjust the time using the operation unit 304, thereby changing the time value to a standard time or the like. It has a function of manual adjustment at an arbitrary time, and performs the same time measurement (time measurement of year / month / day / hour / minute / second) as the real time clock 353. The real-time clock unit 302 automatically adjusts the timekeeping value to the Japan standard time using a radio clock, based on the operator performing an operation to instruct execution of automatic adjustment in the operation unit 304. It should be noted that the automatic adjustment of the timekeeping value to the Japan standard time using the radio timepiece in the real time clock unit 302 may be automatically performed periodically at predetermined time intervals.

  The control unit 303 receives the operation signal input from the operation unit 304 and performs various controls as follows, for example. The control unit 303 performs various controls such as control for adjusting the time value and control for reading the time value for the real time clock unit 302. The control unit 303 performs control to display various information on the information display unit 305. In addition, the control unit 303 performs control to display the reception state of radio waves of the radio clock on the status display unit 306. The control unit 303 performs control to display predetermined information on the 7-segment display unit 307. Further, the control unit 303 performs control to output a date / time command indicating the time value (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) in the real-time clock unit 302 to the outside. The connector 301 is a parallel connector for outputting a date / time command to the outside with a parallel signal in the same data format as the effect control command.

  The date / time command is composed of 2 bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification and type), and the second byte represents EXT (date / time data). Since the effect control command and the date / time command are set so that the MODE data is classified into different categories, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the received command is the effect control based on the MODE data. Whether it belongs to a command or a date / time command can be determined. Such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  For such a date / time data output device 300, eight signal lines L11 to L18 as a parallel signal line for transmitting a date / time command as a parallel signal and one for transmitting a date / time INT signal as a strobe signal. Signal line L19. Parallel connectors (not shown) are provided at both ends of the signal lines L11 to L19. For the signal lines L11 to L19, one end side parallel connector is attached to a parallel connector 301 provided in the date / time data output device 300, and the other end parallel connector is provided on the effect control board 80. By attaching to the parallel-type connector 801, the date / time data output device 300 and the effect control board 80 are connected, and the date / time command is transmitted between the date / time data output device 300 and the effect control microcomputer 100. Enable communication.

  When the date / time data output device 300 is used, a signal obtained by removing the connectors of the signal lines L1 to L9 for the effect control command provided on the effect control board 80 and attaching the connector at one end to the connector 301 of the date / time data output device 300. The connectors on the other end side of the lines L11 to L19 are attached to the connector 801 provided on the effect control board 80. And the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (inspector at the manufacturing stage, the person in charge of the inspector at the shipping stage), and the person at the game hall (game shop clerk, inspector at the game hall, etc.) When an operation for outputting a date / time command is performed in the operation unit 304 by an operator such as a person in charge of the user, the control unit 303 receives a time value (second, minute, hour, day, day, day) from the real-time clock unit 302. (Month, year) data is sequentially read out, and a date / time command indicating the time value indicated by the data is output from the connector 301 to the outside via the signal lines L11 to L18, and a date / time INT signal is output to the outside via the signal line L19. Control to output to. Thus, the date / time command is transmitted through the signal lines L11 to L18 and is input to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the connector 801.

  When the date / time data output device 300 is connected by the signal lines L11 to L19, the effect control microcomputer 100 has eight signal lines L11 to L18 at the capturing timing indicated by the date / time INT signal from the signal line L19. Receive date and time commands from. Specifically, as will be described later, the date / time command is a command (second command, minute command, hour command, day command, day command, each indicating date / time data of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years). Month command and year command) are provided independently (see FIG. 17B described later). Thus, the production control microcomputer 100 can sequentially acquire the date / time data of each of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years according to the type of the received date / time command.

  The production control microcomputer 100 analyzes the MODE data and the EXT data of the received date and time command, and determines that the received command is a date and time command, and any standard value among seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, days, months, and years. Whether the data is indicated and the date and time (second, minute, hour, day of the week, day, month, year) indicated by the date and time command are specified, and the date and time data indicated by the date and time command is used as the time value of the real time clock 353 By changing the time value of the real-time clock 353 based on the setting, the time value of the real-time clock 353 is set to an arbitrary date and time, such as an accurate time value synchronized with the Japanese standard time. For example, the date / time commands from the date / time data output device 300 are sequentially transmitted in the order of second, minute, hour, day of the week, day, month, year, so that the production control microcomputer 100 can execute these series of date / time commands. , The time value data (year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second) of the real-time clock 353 is set as the date / time data based on the date / time data indicated by the date / time command.

  When the setting of the time value of the real-time clock 353 using the date / time data output device 300 is completed, a notification indicating that the setting of the time value has been completed (for example, the change display device 9 indicates such a fact). Notification to display the message shown).

  After setting the time value of the real-time clock 353 using the date / time data output device 300, the connector of the signal lines L11 to L19 is disconnected from the connector 801, and the connector of the signal lines L1 to L9 for the effect control command is again connected. By attaching, it becomes possible to perform effect control of the variable display device 9 and the like based on the effect control command.

  Such a date and time data output device 300 is a device that is used to set the time measured value of the real-time clock 353 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an accurate value. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced into a game arcade (When installed) and when it is necessary to adjust the time value of the real time clock 353, such as when the time value of the real time clock 353 is out of order in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after being introduced to the game hall, It is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and used. The date / time data output device 300 can also adjust the time value of the real-time clock 353 in the manufacturing stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Note that the date / time data output device 300 is not limited to the configuration described above, and may have the following configuration, for example. The date / time data output device 300 may have, for example, a function in which the real-time clock unit 302 automatically adjusts the timekeeping value to Japan standard time based on time information included in radio waves of FM broadcasting. System) may have a function of automatically adjusting the timekeeping value to Japan standard time based on time information included in satellite radio waves. In the date / time data output device 300, for example, the real-time clock unit 302 does not have a function of automatically adjusting the timekeeping value to Japan standard time, and a person operates the operation unit 304 to input standard time data. Based on this, the timekeeping value may be adjusted to Japan standard time.

  In addition, the date / time command can indicate either year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second using 2 bytes of data separated by 1 byte. Second, minute, hour, day, day, An example of sending month and year data in multiple commands was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the date / time command may indicate all of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years by continuous data of a plurality of bytes. That is, data of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years may be transmitted together in one command. In addition, it is generally within a certain range such as seconds, minutes, hours when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the amusement hall. Only those that show a certain range such as minutes and hours are used, and only a part of the time value of the real-time clock 353 (for example, seconds, minutes, hours) is set based on the date / time command. Also good.

  Further, when the configuration using the serial signal line as the signal line for transmitting the effect control command as described above is adopted, the signal line for transmitting the date / time command from the date / time data output device 300 to the effect control microcomputer 100 may be used. It is necessary to use a serial signal line.

  The date and time commands are not limited to sending date / time commands in the order of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years, but dates and times in the order of years, months, days, days of the week, hours, minutes, and seconds. A command may be transmitted.

  Further, instead of the date / time data output device 300, as a device for transmitting a command for setting the time value of the real time clock 353, for example, the real time clock unit 302 has a function of adjusting the time value using a radio clock. Instead, the time value may be adjusted only when the operator appropriately inputs the data of the time value from the outside. That is, as a device for transmitting a command for setting the time value of the real-time clock 353, it is not necessary to transmit a command indicating an accurate date and time based on the Japanese standard date and time, and a command indicating a date and time adjusted by manual input. It is also possible to transmit only. As described above, any device that transmits a command for setting the time measurement value of the real-time clock 353 may be any device that can transmit a command indicating the date and time.

  Next, the external configuration of the date / time data output device 300 will be described. FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the external configuration of the date / time data output device 300. The date / time data output device 300 is a box-shaped device that can be easily carried by an operator. In the date and time data output device 300, an operation unit 304, an information display unit 305, a status display unit 306, and a 7-segment display unit 307 are provided on the surface portion. In the date / time data output device 300, a power switch 308 is provided on the side surface.

  The information display unit 305 includes a liquid crystal display and is used for displaying an image such as a predetermined screen. The status display unit 306 includes a plurality of LEDs, and displays the progress of various controls such as the radio wave reception status of the radio clock according to the lighting status of the LEDs. The 7-segment display unit 307 is composed of a 7-segment LED and displays predetermined information.

  The operation unit 304 is provided with various operation keys such as a numeric key 304a composed of a plurality of keys, a function key 304b composed of a plurality of keys, a cursor key 304c composed of a plurality of keys, and a confirmation key 304d composed of one key. Yes. The numeric key 304a is used for inputting a numeric value. The function key 304b is used for designating a function. The cursor key 304c is used to operate the cursor on the display screen of the information display unit 305. The confirmation key 304d is used for performing an operation for confirming the operation content by the operation unit 304.

  Next, representative examples of the effect control command and the date / time command will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing representative examples of the effect control command and the date / time command in a table format. In FIG. 17A, for each of the representative effect control commands, MODE data and EXT data are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and the instruction content by the command is shown. In FIG. 17B, for each of the representative effect control commands, MODE data and EXT data are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and the instruction content by the command is shown. In the figure, XXH indicates a hexadecimal number, and is a value that is arbitrarily set according to the command content by the effect control command.

  In FIG. 17A, commands 80XXH and 81XXH are variation pattern commands transmitted when the variation display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started. Be notified. In the variation pattern command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern. Further, either “80H” or “81H” is designated as MODE data depending on whether the time reduction state or the storage fluctuation reduction state is set. “80H” is designated for the variable display in the normal state that is not the short time state, and “81H” is designated for the variable display in the short time state. In addition, the type of reach production as described above is specified by setting EXT data.

  The command 8CXXH is a display result command, and it is specified by the setting of the EXT data whether the display result is a probable big hit, a normal big hit, a sudden probable big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In this way, by transmitting the display result command that can specify the type of jackpot, the effect control microcomputer 100 can distinguish whether the jackpot is a big hit or not, and when it is a big hit It is possible to clearly understand what kind of jackpot will be.

  Command 9F00H is the above-described demonstration display command. Command A0XXH is a fanfare designation command that indicates that a specific gaming state is started when a hit such as a probable big hit, a normal big hit, a sudden probable big hit, or a small hit is made. By setting the EXT data , The hit type is specified. In this way, by sending a jackpot start command that can identify the type of jackpot, on the basis of the command, what kind of hit a specific gaming state is started in the production control microcomputer 100 Can be clearly understood. The command A3XXH is an ending designation command that indicates that a specific gaming state is terminated when a hit such as a probable big hit, a normal big win, a sudden probable big hit, or a small hit is made, and the EXT data is set. , The hit type is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the date / time command includes a second command, a minute command, an hour command, a day command, a day command, a month command, a year command, and a transmission end command.

  The command 20XXH is a second command indicating the second, and the number of seconds is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 21XXH is a minute command indicating minutes, and the number of minutes is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 22XXH is a time command indicating the time, and the time is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 23XXH is a day command indicating the day of the week, and the day of the week is designated by the setting of the EXT data. The command 24XXH is a day command indicating the day, and the number of days is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 25XXH is a month command indicating the month, and the month is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 26XXH is a year command indicating the year, and the year (Western calendar) is specified by setting the EXT data. Here, since the EXT data is 1-byte data, only numerical data in the range of “0 to 255” can be specified. In this embodiment, the numerical data is specified in the range of “0 to 255”. Therefore, the year in the range of “2000 to 2255” in the Christian era is shown. For example, when the EXT data is “0”, the data designates “2000”, and when the EXT data is “225”, the data designates “2225”. In the case of this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs processing for replacing such numerical data in the range of “0 to 255” with numerical data in the range of “2000 to 2255”. As the EXT data, by using 2-byte data, the year of the year such as 2000 may be directly designated by the numerical data. The command 2700H is a transmission end command for designating that the transmission is completed when the transmission of the date / time command is completed. As the EXT data, the last two digits of the year may be specified using 1-byte data.

  As described above, the date / time command is a command output from the date / time data output device 300, and is sequentially transmitted in the order of the second command, minute command, hour command, day of week command, day command, month command, and year command. At the end of transmission, a transmission end command is transmitted.

  The production control microcomputer 100 sequentially receives the date and time commands transmitted in this order, and based on the received commands, the second register, minute register, hour register, day register in the clock output / calendar function unit 364 , Day register, month register, and year register by sequentially setting each count value, these count values can be set to any year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second. The current year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second can be counted correctly.

  In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the transmission end command, the variable display device 9 executes date / time setting completion notification for displaying a message indicating that the date / time setting is completed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 100 starts executing the effect control main process when the power is turned on. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control process, and the like is performed (S700).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a backup power supply monitoring process for monitoring the backup power supplied by the backup power supply circuit 355 (S700A). Then, information setting processing is performed for setting various information related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as setting of information related to the time measured value of the real-time clock 353 and setting of information related to special demonstration display effects stored in the backup RAM 356 ( S701).

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 monitors the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in S702, the effect control microcomputer 100 clears the timer interrupt flag (S703) and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first performs an information disappearance management process (S703A). In the information disappearance management process, when it is determined in the above-described backup power supply monitoring process that the supply of backup power is lost, the clock information for notifying that the time count information of the real-time clock 353 stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared Announcement notification is made. When various data stored in the backup RAM 356 disappear, a data input program is started by the effect control microcomputer 100 based on performing a predetermined operation, and the operation button 120, effect switch 354b, etc. Various data can be input in accordance with an operation using the operation means.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a notification content setting process for setting a notification content when a predetermined notification effect is executed at a predetermined notification timing (S704). The notice effect is an effect for giving a predetermined notice to the player regarding the game during the game. In this embodiment, for example, an effect of notifying the contents of “recommended stand”, “excellent stand”, “amanail stand”, etc. as a notice effect during the game is performed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis processing: S705).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a demonstration display process (S706). In the demonstration display process, the process corresponding to the current control state (demo display process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the demonstration display effect by the moving image using the variable display device 9 is executed. To do.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect control process processing (S707). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. Next, a clock management process for managing the time value of the real time clock 353 is performed by setting the time value of the real time clock 353 using the date / time data output device 300 described later (S707A).

  Then, a random display determining random number for determining the left and right decorative symbols to be displayed on the variable display device 9 and a jackpot display for determining the big symbol of the decorative symbols to be displayed on the variable display device 9 A random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a design determining random number is executed (S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702.

  The effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is input to the interrupt terminal of the effect control microcomputer 100. For example, when an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, an INT interrupt is generated in the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, when the INT interrupt is generated, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of receiving the effect control command in the INT interrupt process. In the process of receiving the effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the received effect control command data in a command reception buffer provided in the RAM 85. In addition, when the connector is removed and replaced as described above, similarly, the date / time INT signal from the date / time data output device 300 is the same as the interrupt terminal to which the effect control INT signal is input in the effect control microcomputer 100. Input to the interrupt terminal. For example, when the date / time INT signal from the date / time data output device 300 is turned on, an INT interrupt is generated in the production control microcomputer 100. Then, when the INT interrupt is generated, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a process of receiving a date / time command in the INT interrupt process. In the process of receiving the date / time command, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the received date / time command data in a command reception buffer provided in the RAM 85.

  The effect control command from the main board 31 and the date / time command from the date / time data output device 300 are respectively sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 by the INT interrupt process of FIG. 19 which is an interrupt process different from the effect control main process. Received.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control command and the date / time command received by the effect control microcomputer 100 are stored in a command reception buffer which is a storage area for storing the received command provided in the RAM 85. The command reception buffer is a ring buffer type buffer capable of storing six 2-byte commands. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. Each of the reception command buffers 1 to 12 is a buffer used corresponding to each of the values of the command reception number counter being 0 to 11. Note that the command reception buffer does not necessarily have to be a ring buffer format. For example, three command designation command storage areas (2 × 3 = 6 byte command reception buffer), and other command storage such as fluctuation pattern designation are stored. A buffer configuration such as one area (2 × 1 = 2-byte command reception buffer) may be used.

  Each time the production control microcomputer 100 receives a command (production control command and date / time command), the reception number counter is incremented from zero. When the command reception number counter is 0, the reception command buffer 1 is selected and the reception command is stored.

  When the command reception number counter is 2, the reception command buffer 3 is selected and the reception command is stored. Further, when the command reception number counter is 10, the reception command buffer 11 is selected and the reception command is stored. Further, when the command reception number counter is 11, the reception command buffer 12 is selected and the reception command is stored. Depending on the number of commands transmitted in this manner, the production control microcomputer 100 stores different buffer storage areas, which are storage areas for receiving received commands. This received command buffer can store received commands up to 12 times at the same time, and when a new command is received with commands stored in all storage areas from the received command buffer 1 to the received command buffer 12 In this case, since the command reception number counter is counted up again from 0, new commands are sequentially overwritten from the reception command buffer 1 which is a storage area storing the oldest command to the reception command buffer 12 in order. It is a ring buffer that repeats.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an INT interrupt process executed by the production control microcomputer 100. The INT interrupt process is a process executed as an interrupt process every time an INT signal (effect control INT signal or date / time INT signal) is received.

  First, a process for reading a transmitted command (production control command or date / time command) is performed (S711). Next, it is determined whether or not the read command is the first byte (S712). For example, a command form that can identify whether it is the first byte or the second byte, such as making the value of the specific bit different between the first byte and the second byte of the command, and based on the value of the specific bit, It is desirable to determine whether it is the first byte or the second byte. If the read command is the first byte command in S712, the process proceeds to S718, the received data is stored in the received command buffer pointed to by the command reception number counter, and the process proceeds to S719 described later.

  In S712, it is determined whether or not the first byte has been received if the read command is not the first byte command (S713). In S713, if the first byte of data has not been received yet, the process proceeds to S719 described later. On the other hand, if the first byte command has already been received in S713, the process proceeds to S714, and the received command is stored in the storage area indicated by “command reception number counter value + 1”, that is, the received command buffer 2. Then, the value of the command reception number counter is “+2”. As a result, in the area where the next received command is stored, the first byte becomes the reception command buffer 3 and the second byte becomes the reception command buffer 4. Thereafter, in the next INT interrupt processing, the value of the command reception number counter is incremented by +2, and the storage area in which the first byte is stored becomes the reception command buffers 5, 7, 9, 11 sequentially. The storage areas for storing the second byte are sequentially received command buffers 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the command reception number counter is 12 or more (S716). In S716, if the command reception number counter is not 12 or more, the process proceeds to S719 described later. On the other hand, if the command reception number counter is 12 or more in S716, the command reception number counter is cleared (S717), and the process proceeds to S719 described later. As a result, the command can be stored in the reception buffer until the two-byte data constituting one command is received six times, and the two-byte data as the command received after the seventh time is stored in the previously received command. Will be overwritten and memorized. Next, in S719, an interrupt is permitted and the INT interrupt process is terminated. Through the processing as described above, the production control command or date / time command data composed of 2 bytes is received by the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the backup power supply monitoring process (S700A) of FIG. In the backup power supply monitoring process, based on determining whether or not the above-described voltage drop signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 357, it is determined whether or not there is no supply of backup power that can store backup data in the backup RAM 356. Judgment is made (S601).

  If it is determined in S601 that the backup power is not supplied, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S601 that the supply of backup power has been lost, a clock information disappearance flag indicating that the information of the real-time clock 353 has disappeared is set (S602). Then, an information disappearance notification timer is set for measuring a period for executing the clock information disappearance notification for notifying that the information of the real-time clock 353 has disappeared (S603), and the information disappearance notification indicating that the clock information disappearance notification is performed. A flag is set (S604). Then, the time of the time measured value of the real time clock 353 is initialized to 9:00:00 which is a default value of a predetermined initial setting value (S605), and the process returns. The default value of the initial setting value for the time measurement value of the real-time clock 353 is stored in the ROM 359 and is read from the ROM 359 and used.

  The real-time clock 353 has an initial time value of 00/00/00 00:00:00, and resets the time value to such initial value when the backup power is not supplied as described above. Therefore, when the backup power is not supplied, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the operation of the real-time clock 353 itself starts counting from an initial value of 00:00:00 00:00:00. However, when the production control microcomputer 100 executes S605 described above, control is performed to start timing from the default value of the initial setting value such as 9:00:00. The default value of the initial setting value in this case is set in advance at a time (a time for preparing for opening a store) before the general opening time of the game hall, such as 9:00:00. Thus, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on before the game hall is opened, when the actual time is 9:00:00, which is the default value of the initial setting value (or 9:00:00) If the backup power is not supplied, the real-time clock 353 will keep the same time as the actual time until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. Become.

  Next, a display example of a setting screen displayed on the variable display device 9 when various information is set by the information setting process in S701 of FIG. 18 will be described.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the power switch 911 turned on is turned on when the clear switch 912 is turned on (the effect switch 354 and the operation button 120 are turned off), the power is turned on. When the operation button 120 is turned on for more than 5 seconds from the time when the game is turned on until 30 seconds elapses, data indicating the timing at which a predetermined effect is executed is arbitrarily set at the game hall at startup. The hall setting mode screen is displayed, and the hole setting mode screen is displayed on the variable display device 9. The hall setting mode screen is a screen displayed in the hall setting mode. On the hall setting mode screen, the operation area for selecting the display of the golden time setting screen for setting the data related to the effect for performing the special demonstration display (including the mission effect) and the data regarding the effect for displaying the almighty symbol are displayed. An operation area for selecting display of an almighty symbol setting screen for setting is displayed. The operator selects one of these operation areas in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120, and determines the selection of the setting screen to be displayed in response to operating the effect switch 354. When such an operation is performed, the selected setting screen is displayed on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 21 shows a display on the variable display device 9 when setting effect data (data indicating the start time of the effect in the present embodiment) related to a special demonstration display that is an effect performed based on the time value of the real-time clock 353. It is a display screen figure which shows the golden time setting screen. When the golden time setting screen is displayed, the operation button 120 is used as an operation means for performing a selection operation for selecting various items, and a determination operation for making various decisions on the selected item. A production switch 354 is used as an operating means for performing the above.

  On the golden time setting screen, a time setting area 955 for displaying information for arbitrarily setting the time for executing the special demonstration display as the effect execution condition in the effect data is displayed. The time setting area 955 displays a plurality of predetermined execution display times for special demonstration display such as 12:00, 14:00, 16:00, 18:00, 20:00, 22:00, etc. Correspondingly, a check box for selecting the time for executing the special demonstration display is displayed by setting the execution of the special demonstration display to OFF (stop the execution). Also, on the golden time setting screen, a first rotation setting area 958 for setting the timing for executing the special demonstration display as the time of the first fluctuation display after power-on is displayed instead of the time. In the first rotation setting area 958, as in the time setting area 955, a check box for setting to turn off execution of a special demonstration display (stop execution) is displayed.

  Further, on the golden time setting screen, an operation area 956 that is operated when finalizing the setting of effect data and finishing the setting, and an operation when returning to the hall setting mode screen after finishing the display of the golden time setting screen. An operation area 957 is displayed. In addition, on the golden time setting screen, an operation guidance for the operation button 120 and the production switch 354 on the golden time setting screen such as “movement of frame button (another name for the operation button 120)” and “decision of production switch” is performed. It is. In the time setting area 955, fixed execution condition information (hereinafter, referred to as “special demonstration display fixed time”) of a time set as a time at which a special demonstration display is necessarily executed is displayed (for example, “Monday to Friday: 9pm, 19pm and 21:00 are always on "and" Saturday / Sunday: 9am, 17:00, 19:00 and 21:00 must be on ". Such special demo display fixed time data is stored in the golden time setting data area of the ROM 359 shown in FIG. 7, and it is impossible to select to stop the execution. Since the special demonstration display fixed time is stored in the ROM 359, even if the data indicating the time for executing the special demonstration display stored in the backup RAM 356 disappears, the special demonstration stored in the ROM 359 is deleted. By reading and using the data at the fixed display time, a special demonstration display can be executed at a predetermined time.

  When the operation button 120 is pressed when the golden time setting screen is displayed, a special demonstration display provided in a plurality of times is displayed in the time setting area 955 displayed on the variable display device 9 each time the operation button 120 is operated. Each of the execution selection times (display items) is selected according to a predetermined order, and the display items of the first rotation setting area 958, the operation area 956, and the operation area 957 are selected according to a predetermined order. Can do. In the golden time setting screen, the selected area among the selectable areas is displayed in a predetermined color (selection notification color), and it is indicated which area is selected. The operation for selecting an item with the operation button 120 in this way is referred to as a selection operation in the following description.

Then, on the golden time setting screen, when one of the execution selection times for the special demonstration display in the time setting area 955 is selected, if the presentation switch 354 is pressed, the check box is displayed each time it is operated. The check mark and release of the check mark are alternately performed. This makes it possible on the basis of operating the operation buttons 120 and directing the switch 354, to arbitrarily set the runtime time special demonstration display (setting change). In the following description, an operation for making some setting such as setting of presence / absence of execution by the operation of the effect switch 354 and setting of numerical data for the item selected in this way is referred to as a setting operation. In addition, as a call name of such an operation including the setting operation and the above-described selection operation, a call name of a selection / setting operation is used in the following description.

  When the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 956 is selected, the operation is a setting end operation, and when the operation is performed, a special demonstration display shown in the time setting area 955 is executed. The time and the setting shown in the first rotation setting area 958 are updated and stored as information regarding a special demonstration display stored in the backup RAM 356. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a special demonstration display stored in the backup RAM 356 is executed based on the operation of the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 by displaying the golden time setting screen. Information relating to execution of a special demonstration display such as time information can be arbitrarily set (setting change). When the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 957 is selected, the operation is a return operation, the display of the golden time setting screen is terminated, and the screen displayed on the variable display device 9 is the hall setting mode. Return to screen display.

  Among the times when special demonstration displays are executed, special demonstration displays that are executed during business hours (10:00 to 23:00) are displays that are intended to show the player and improve the production effect. The special demonstration display executed outside the time (for example, 9 o'clock, etc.) is compared with the special demonstration display of a plurality of pachinko machines 1 to determine whether or not the timekeeping value of the real-time clock 353 is out of order. It is a display intended to do.

  FIG. 22 sets effect execution conditions (data indicating the date on which the almighty symbol is displayed) in the effect data related to the display of the almighty symbol that is the effect performed based on the time value of the real-time clock 353. It is a display screen figure which shows the almighty symbol setting screen displayed in the fluctuation | variation display apparatus 9 when doing. When the almighty symbol setting screen is displayed, as in the case when the golden time setting screen is displayed, the operation button 120 is used as an operation means for performing a selection operation, and an effect switch as an operation means for performing a determination operation. 354 is used.

  On the almighty symbol setting screen, a date setting area 961 for displaying information for arbitrarily setting a date to be executed as effect data out of the date and time when the almighty symbol is displayed is displayed. For the display of almighty symbols, the date and time to be executed are set, and during the period specified by the date and time, as the symbol used for variable display, the variable display with the symbol including the almighty symbol is changed from the variable display with the symbol not including the almighty symbol. This is done by changing to In this embodiment, the almighty symbol execution time stored in the ROM 359 is fixedly used as the set value of the time among the date and time when the almighty symbol display is executed. Therefore, here, only the day is arbitrarily set out of the date and time when the display of the almighty symbol is executed.

  In the day setting area 961, execution selection of display of almighty symbols including a designated day of each month such as “7th, 17th, 27th of every month” and a predetermined day of the week such as “Monday” to “Friday” In order to select a time for displaying the almighty symbol by setting the almighty symbol display to be turned off (stopping execution) corresponding to each execution selection date. The checkbox is displayed.

  Further, on the almighty symbol setting screen, an operation region 962 is operated when finalizing the setting of the effect data and finishing the setting, and when the display of the almighty symbol setting screen is terminated and the screen returns to the hall setting mode screen. An operation area 963 is displayed. In the almighty symbol setting screen, as in the golden time setting screen, the operation button 120 and the rendering switch 354 on the almighty symbol setting screen such as “movement of frame button (another name for the operation button 120)” and “decision switch decision” are displayed. A display for guiding the operation is performed. In the day setting area 961, fixed execution condition information (hereinafter referred to as an almighty symbol fixed date) that is set as a date on which the almighty symbol display is necessarily executed is displayed (for example, “Saturday / Sunday is always "It will be ON" is displayed). Such almighty symbol fixed date data is stored in the almighty symbol setting data area of the ROM 359 as shown in FIG. 7, and it is impossible to select to stop the execution. Since the almighty symbol fixed date is stored in the ROM 359, the almighty stored in the ROM 359 disappears even if the data indicating the time for executing the almighty symbol display stored in the backup RAM 356 disappears. By reading and using the symbol fixed day data, the almighty symbol can be displayed at a predetermined time for a predetermined day.

  When the operation button 120 is pressed when the almighty symbol setting screen is displayed, a plurality of almighty symbols are displayed in the day setting area 961 displayed on the variable display device 9 each time the operation button 120 is pressed. Each of the execution selection dates (display items) can be selected according to a predetermined order, and a selection operation for selecting the operation area 962, the operation area 963, and (display items) according to a predetermined order can be performed. . On the almighty symbol setting screen, the selected area among the selectable areas is displayed in a predetermined color (selection notification color), which indicates which area is selected.

  Then, on the almighty symbol setting screen, when the execution selection date (day or day) of any special almighty symbol in the day setting area 961 is selected, if the effect switch 354 is pressed, each time it is operated In addition, it is possible to perform a setting operation in which a check mark for a check box and release of the check mark are alternately performed. Thereby, based on operating the operation button 120 and the production switch 354, the execution date of almighty symbol display can be arbitrarily set (setting change).

  If the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 962 is selected, the operation becomes a setting end operation, and the display execution date of the almighty symbol shown in the day setting area 961 when the operation is performed. Is updated and stored as information relating to the display of the almighty symbol stored in the backup RAM 356. Thus, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the almighty symbol setting screen is displayed and the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 are operated to display the almighty symbol display execution date stored in the backup RAM 356. It is possible to arbitrarily set (change the setting) information relating to execution of almighty symbol display, such as the above information. When the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 963 is selected, the operation is a return operation, the display of the almighty symbol setting screen is terminated, and the screen displayed on the variable display device 9 is the hall setting mode. Return to screen display. When a return operation is performed, the display execution date of the almighty symbol shown in the date setting area 961 on the almighty symbol setting screen at that time is not updated and stored in the backup RAM 356. The timing for executing the display of the almighty symbol is the execution date information that can be set using the almighty symbol setting screen in this way, the execution date information based on the almighty symbol fixed date data stored in the ROM 358, and the ROM 358. Is stored on the basis of the information on the execution time (time zone from 12:00 to 13:00 as will be described later).

  In addition, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the power switch 911 turned on, the power was turned on while the clear switch 912 and the effect switch 354 were turned on at the same time (the operation button 120 was turned off). At the time of startup, the unit information setting mode is entered, and the unit information setting mode screen is displayed on the variable display device 9. The stand information setting mode screen is a screen displayed in the stand information setting mode, which is a setting mode in which the time value of the real time clock 353 can be set and the number of working days can be initialized.

  FIG. 23 is a display screen diagram showing a table information setting mode screen. In the stand information setting mode screen, an operation area 964 for selecting display of a date and time reset screen for resetting the time value of the real-time clock 353, and a stand information initialization screen for initializing the working days are displayed. An operation area 965 for selecting display and an operation area 966 for selecting to end the display of the base information setting mode screen are displayed. When the stand information setting mode screen is displayed, the operation button 120 is used as the operation means for performing the selection operation, and the effect switch 354 is used as the operation means for performing the determination operation, as in the case described above. The operator selects one of these operation areas 964 to 966 in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120 and determines selection of any item in response to operating the effect switch 354.

  Also, information indicating a note “Please do not change if there is no problem” is displayed on the table information setting mode screen. Further, on the stand information setting mode screen, the operation button 120 and the show switch 354 on the stand information setting mode screen such as “move the frame button (another name of the operation button 120) item” and “decide the effect switch” are displayed. A display for guiding the operation is performed.

  If the operation button 120 is pressed when the stand information setting mode screen is displayed, each of the operation areas 964 to 966 (display items) displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined in advance each time the operation button 120 is pressed. It is possible to perform a selection operation for selecting according to the given order. On the table information setting mode screen, the selected area among the selectable areas is displayed in a predetermined color (selection notification color), and it is indicated which area is selected.

  Then, when the effect switch 354 is pressed when any of the operation areas 964 to 966 is selected, the display of the date / time reset screen is started according to the item selected at the time of the operation, One of the display start of the table information initialization screen and the display end of the table information setting mode screen is performed in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 24 is a display screen diagram showing a date resetting screen. When the date and time reset screen is displayed, the operation button 120 is used as the operation means for performing the selection operation, and the effect switch 354 is used as the operation means for performing the determination operation, as in the case described above. On the date / time reset screen, time value information 952 indicating the current time value (year, month, day, day, hour, minute, second) of the real-time clock 353 is displayed. The display of the time value in the time value information 952 is performed based on the current time value information in the real time clock 353. Furthermore, in the date / time reset screen, an operation area 953 that is operated when setting the time value, and an operation area that is operated when setting the time value is canceled (when the display of the date / time reset screen is ended). 954 is displayed. Also, on the date and time resetting screen, information indicating a note “Please do not change if there is no problem” is displayed as in the base information setting mode screen. Furthermore, on the date / time resetting screen, similarly to the stand information setting mode screen, the operation button 120 and the production switch such as “Move the frame button (another name for the operation button 120)” and “Determine the production switch” are displayed. A display for guiding operation 354 is performed.

  When the operation button 120 is pressed when the date / time reset screen is displayed, the time data information 952 displayed on the variable display device 9 displays the year data display area and the month each time it is operated. Select a data display area, day data display area, hour data display area, minute data display area, or second data display area (display item) according to a predetermined order. In addition, a selection operation can be performed in which the operation area 953, the operation area 954, and (display items) are selected according to a predetermined order. On the date / time resetting screen, the selected area among the selectable areas is displayed in a predetermined color (selection notification color), which indicates which area is selected.

  When the date, month, day, hour, minute, and second data display areas are selected on the date and time resetting screen, if the presentation switch 354 is pressed, it is displayed each time it is operated. As each data is added and updated one by one (for example, the minute data is updated as 57 minutes → 58 minutes → 59 minutes), and when the upper limit value of each data is exceeded, each data is further increased from the lower limit value. An addition update operation (numerical data setting operation) can be performed (for example, minute data is updated as 59 minutes → 00 minutes → 01 minutes). Thereby, based on operating the operation button 120 and the production switch 354, each data of year, month, day, hour, minute, and second can be arbitrarily set (setting change, resetting). For the year data, for example, only the lower two-digit portion “07” of “2007” can be set and operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for year data, all four digits may be set and operated.

  When the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 953 is selected, the operation becomes a time setting operation, and a confirmation window indicating a confirmation message “Are you sure?” Is displayed as an operation confirmation image. The If the effect switch 354 is pressed while the confirmation window is displayed and the operation area 953 is selected, the operation becomes a time setting operation (confirmation operation), and is displayed when the operation is performed. The measured time value (year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second) is updated and stored as the time value of the real-time clock 353. Accordingly, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the time reset value is displayed on the real time clock 353 based on the operation of the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 by displaying the date / time reset screen from the table information setting mode screen. Information can be set arbitrarily (setting change). On the other hand, if the operation window 954 is selected and the effect switch 354 is pressed while the confirmation window is displayed, the operation becomes a cancel operation, the confirmation message disappears, and the operation is performed again. When the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 954 is selected, the display of the date / time resetting screen is terminated (returns to the display of the table information setting mode screen).

  FIG. 25 is a display screen diagram showing a table information initialization screen. When the stand information initialization screen is displayed, as in the case described above, operation button 120 is used as an operation means for performing a selection operation, and effect switch 354 is used as an operation means for performing a determination operation. In the stand information initialization screen, the time value information 971 of the real-time clock 353 indicating the operation start date and the operation day information from the operation start date to the current date (the operation days are the current date based on the time value of the real-time clock 353) (Obtained by subtracting the operation start date from)) 972. The display of the time measurement value information 971 and the operation day information 972 is performed based on the operation start date information stored in the operation start date storage area of the backup RAM 356. For example, in the manufacturing process of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the initial value of the information on the number of working days is set in advance at an arbitrary date and time (for example, manufacturing date and time). Furthermore, in the stand information initialization screen, when the operation area 973 operated when initializing the operation start date and canceling the initialization of the operation days (when terminating the display of the stand information initialization screen) The operation area 974 to be operated is displayed. Also, on the machine information initialization screen, information indicating a note “Please do not change if there is no problem” is displayed, as in the machine information setting mode screen. Furthermore, on the stand information initialization screen, the operation buttons 120 and the show switches such as “Move the frame button (another name for the operation button 120) item” and “Determine the show switch” are the same as the stand information setting mode screen. A display for guiding operation 354 is performed.

  If the operation button 120 is pressed when the stand information initialization screen is displayed, the operation area 973 and the operation area 974 (display items) displayed on the variable display device 9 are stored in advance each time the operation button 120 is operated. A selection operation can be performed according to a predetermined order. In the stand information initialization screen, the selected area among the selectable areas is displayed in a predetermined color (selection notification color), which indicates which area is selected.

  Then, if the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 973 is selected on the stand information initialization screen, the operation becomes an initialization operation, and a confirmation message “Are you sure?” Is displayed as an operation confirmation image. A confirmation window is displayed. If the effect switch 354 is pressed while the confirmation window is displayed and the operation area 973 is selected, the operation becomes an initialization operation (confirmation operation) and is stored in the operation start date / time storage area of the backup RAM 356. The information on the operation start date / time that has been set is initialized, and the information on the number of operation days is initialized to “0”. Specifically, the operation start date / time information is updated and stored in the current time value of the real-time clock 353. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the operation start date and time is initialized based on the operation of the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 by displaying the device information initialization screen from the device information setting mode screen. The working days can be initialized. On the other hand, if the operation window 974 is selected and the effect switch 354 is pressed while the confirmation window is displayed, the operation becomes a cancel operation, the confirmation message disappears, and the operation is performed again. When the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 974 is selected, the display of the base information initialization screen is terminated (returns to the display of the base information setting mode screen). In the state where the confirmation window is displayed, the timing operation may be stopped at the date and time when the timing value is input, or the timing operation may proceed from the input date and time.

  Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the power switch 911 turned on is turned on while the clear switch 912, the effect switch 354, and the operation button 120 are turned on at the same time. At startup, the operation day change setting mode is entered, and the operation day change setting mode screen is displayed on the variable display device 9. The working day change setting mode screen is a screen displayed in the working day change setting mode which is a setting mode for arbitrarily setting data indicating the working days in the game arcade.

  FIG. 26 is a display screen diagram showing the working day change setting mode screen. When the working day change setting mode screen is displayed, the operation button 120 is used as the operation means for performing the selection operation, and the effect switch 354 is used as the operation means for performing the determination operation, as in the case described above. In the operation day change setting mode screen, as with the device information initialization screen, time value information 981 of the real-time clock 353 indicating the operation start date, and operation day information from the operation start date to the current date (the operation days are 982) obtained by subtracting the operation start date from the current date based on the time measured value of the real-time clock 353. Furthermore, in the operation day change setting mode screen, an operation area 983 that is operated when the operation days are increased, an operation area 984 that is operated when the operation days are decreased, and the display of the operation start date data setting screen are ended. An operation area 985 to be operated is displayed. The operator selects one of these operation areas 983 to 985 according to the operation of the operation button 120, and determines the selection of any item according to the operation of the effect switch 354. In addition, on the operating day change setting mode screen, information indicating a note “Please adjust if it differs from the operating days of other units” is displayed. In addition, in the operating days change setting mode screen, operation buttons 120 and effects such as “moves the frame button (another name for the operation button 120) item” and “decides the effect switch” are the same as in the machine information setting mode screen. A display for guiding the operation of the switch 354 is performed.

  When the operation button 120 is pressed when the operation day change setting mode screen is displayed, the operation areas 983 to 985 (display items) displayed on the variable display device 9 are determined in advance each time the operation button 120 is operated. The selection operation can be performed according to the selected order. In the working day change setting mode screen, the selected area among the selectable areas is displayed in a predetermined color (selection notification color), which indicates which area is selected. .

  When the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 983 is selected on the operation day change setting mode screen, the displayed operation start date is decremented and updated by one day each time it is operated. The displayed number of working days is added and updated one day at a time. On the other hand, when the production switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 984 is selected on the operation day change setting mode screen, the displayed operation start date is incremented and updated one day each time the operation switch 354 is operated. The displayed number of working days is subtracted and updated one day at a time. The operation of the effect switch 354 for increasing / decreasing the number of working days in this way corresponds to a setting operation for setting numerical data for the selected item. When the effect switch 354 is pressed while the operation area 985 is selected, the operation start date displayed when the operation is performed is updated and stored as the operation start date stored in the backup RAM 356. The display of the working day change setting mode screen ends. Thus, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the operation start date stored in the backup RAM 356 is displayed on the basis of operating the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 by displaying the operation day change setting mode screen. Data can be set arbitrarily (setting change), and operation days data can be set arbitrarily (setting change). In addition, since the production | generation etc. which generate | occur | produce for the 20th working day can be easily generated when the working days are added, for example, when the change of working days is set, it may be possible to subtract only the working days.

  Next, in the hall setting mode, an operation procedure necessary for setting the production data related to the special demonstration display and an operation procedure necessary for setting the production data related to the demonstration display of the almighty symbol will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an operation procedure in the hall setting mode. Referring to FIG. 27, when operating button 120 is turned on within 30 seconds after power switch 911 is turned on while only clear switch 912 is pressed (turned on), change display device 9 The above-mentioned hall setting mode screen is displayed.

  When the hall setting mode screen is displayed, an operation for selecting the operation area for selecting the display of the golden time setting screen by operating the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 and determining to display the golden time setting screen is performed. When this is done, the golden time setting screen shown in FIG.

  When the golden time setting screen is displayed, the selection operation of the item as described above by the selection operation of the operation button 120 and the determination operation of the effect switch 354 and the setting operation (selection / setting operation for the selected item). ) Is performed, the display corresponding to the above-described operation such as the display of the selection notification color and the display of the check mark is performed. In addition, when the setting end operation is performed by selecting the operation area 956, the information set on the golden time setting screen at that time is stored in the backup RAM 356, the setting is ended, and the hall setting mode is ended. When the operation area 957 is selected and a return operation is performed, the display of the golden time setting screen is terminated and the display returns to the display of the hall setting mode screen.

  In addition, when the hall setting mode screen is displayed, an operation for selecting display of the almighty symbol setting screen by selecting the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 and determining to display almighty is performed. Then, the almighty symbol setting screen shown in FIG.

  When the almighty symbol setting screen is displayed, the selection operation of the item as described above and the setting operation (selection / setting operation for the selected item) by the selection operation of the operation button 120 and the determination operation of the effect switch 354 are performed. ) Is performed, the display corresponding to the above-described operation such as the display of the selection notification color and the display of the check mark is performed. Further, when the setting end operation is performed by selecting the operation area 962, the information set on the almighty symbol setting screen at that time is stored in the backup RAM 356, the setting ends, and the hole setting mode ends. When the operation area 963 is selected and a return operation is performed, the display of the almighty symbol setting screen ends and the display returns to the display of the hall setting mode screen.

  Next, in the table information setting mode, an operation procedure necessary for setting the time value of the real time clock 353 and an operation necessary for initializing the operation days obtained based on the time value of the real time clock 353 are described. The procedure is described.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an operation procedure in the base information setting mode. Referring to FIG. 28, when the power switch 911 is turned on while the clear switch 912 and the effect switch 354 are pressed (turned on), the table information setting mode screen of FIG. 23 is displayed on the variable display device 9. The

  When the stand information setting mode screen is displayed, the operation area 964 for selecting the display of the date / time reset screen is selected by the operation of the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 and the date / time reset screen is determined to be displayed. When the operation is performed, the date and time resetting screen shown in FIG.

  When the date / time reset screen is displayed, the selection operation of the operation button 120 and the determination operation of the effect switch 354 allow the selection operation of the item as described above and the setting operation (selection of the selected item). When the setting operation is performed, display corresponding to the above-described operation such as display of the selected notification color and display of the numerical value to be set is performed. When the operation area 954 is selected and a cancel operation is performed, the display of the date / time reset screen is terminated and the display returns to the display of the table information setting mode screen. When the time setting operation is performed by selecting the operation area 953, the above-described operation confirmation image is displayed. If the operation area 953 is selected again and the time setting operation is performed while the operation confirmation image is displayed, the information set on the date / time reset screen at that time is stored in the backup RAM 356 and set. Is ended and the table information setting mode is ended. On the other hand, when the operation confirmation image is displayed and the cancel operation is performed by selecting the operation area 954, the operation is performed again.

  Further, when the stand information setting mode screen is displayed, the operation area 965 for selecting the display of the stand information initialization screen is selected by the operation of the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354, and the stand information initialization screen is displayed. When the operation for determining this is performed, the base information initialization screen shown in FIG.

  When the item selection operation as described above is performed by the selection operation of the operation button 120 and the determination operation of the effect switch 354 while the stand information initialization screen is displayed, the display of the selection notification color, etc. The display corresponding to the operation is performed. When the operation area 974 is selected and a cancel operation is performed, the display of the base information initialization screen ends and the display returns to the display of the base information setting mode screen. Further, when the operation region 973 is selected and an initialization operation is performed, the above-described operation confirmation image is displayed. When the operation confirmation image is displayed and the operation area 973 is selected again and the initialization operation is performed, the operation start date and time information stored in the operation start date and time storage area of the backup RAM 356 is initialized. Then, the information on the number of working days is initialized to “0”, the information is stored in the backup RAM 356, the setting is completed, and the unit information setting mode is ended. When the operation area 974 is selected and a cancel operation is performed, the display of the base information initialization screen ends and the display returns to the display of the base information setting mode screen.

  Further, when the stand information setting mode screen is displayed, the operation area 966 for selecting to end the display of the stand information setting mode screen is selected by operating the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 to set the stand information setting. When an operation for deciding to end the display of the mode screen is performed, the setting is completed and the table information setting mode is ended.

  Next, an operation procedure necessary for setting to change the working days in the working days change setting mode will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an operation procedure in the working day change setting mode. Referring to FIG. 29, when the power switch 911 is turned on while the clear switch 912, the production switch 354, and the operation button 120 are pressed (turned on), the number of working days in FIG. The change setting mode screen is displayed.

  When the operation day change setting mode screen is displayed, the selection operation of the item and the setting operation (selection / selection of the selected item) as described above by the selection operation of the operation button 120 and the determination operation of the effect switch 354 are performed. When the setting operation is performed, display corresponding to the above-described operation such as display of the selection notification color and display of the numerical value to be set (increase or decrease in working days, etc.) is performed. In addition, when an end operation for ending the operation day change setting mode is performed by selecting the operation area 985 and operating the effect switch 354, the operation start date displayed at the time of the operation is backed up. The operating days are set by being updated and stored as the operating start date stored in the RAM 356, and the display of the operating day change setting mode screen is completed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, it is necessary to operate the clear switch 912 when the power is turned on in order to shift to the hall setting mode. In order to shift to the stand information setting mode, it is necessary to simultaneously operate the clear switch 912 and the effect switch 354 when the power is turned on. In order to shift to the working days variation setting mode, it is necessary to simultaneously operate the clear switch 912, the effect switch 354, and the operation button 120 when the power is turned on. As described above, since the number of operation means operated at power-on differs depending on the setting mode to be transferred, it is necessary when shifting to each setting mode among the setting procedures for setting data according to each setting mode. The setting procedure is different. In other words, the procedures for displaying the screens as shown in FIGS. 21 to 26 that enable the setting according to the operation of the operation means such as the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 are different.

  Specifically, the setting procedure is set more complicatedly in the working day variation setting mode in which the operation of two operation means is required than in the hall setting mode in which the operation of one operation means is required. In addition, the operating days variation setting mode that requires the operation of three operating means is different from the hall setting mode that requires the operation of one operating means and the stand information setting mode that requires the operation of two operating means. There is a complicated setting procedure. Such a setting procedure is set to be more complicated as the importance of the information to be set is higher.

  Further, the table information setting mode includes a procedure in which an operation confirmation image is displayed and two time setting operations or initialization operations (confirmation operations) are required in S548 to S550 and S558 to S560 in FIG. On the other hand, in the hall setting mode, such a procedure is not included as a setting procedure when setting an effect such as a special demonstration display. Thereby, also from such a procedure, the setting procedure is more complicatedly set in the working days variation setting mode than in the hall setting mode.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the base information setting mode is shifted from the distance between the clear switch 912 and the power switch 911 operated when the power is turned on to shift to the hall setting mode. Therefore, the distance between the effect switch 354, the power switch 911, and the clear switch 912 that are operated when the power is turned on is longer. Also, as shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the distance between the clear switch 912 and the power switch 911 operated when the power is turned on to shift to the hall setting mode, and the base information setting mode are shifted. Therefore, the operation button 120 that is operated when the power is turned on in order to shift to the working day variation setting mode rather than the distance between the effect switch 354 that is operated when the power is turned on, the power switch 911 and the clear switch 912. The distance between the power switch 911 and the clear switch 912 is longer. The longer the distance between the operating means operating simultaneously, the harder it is to operate, so the setting procedure for setting data in each setting mode is complicated. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the length of the distance of the operating means operated simultaneously, the setting procedure is set more complicated in the base information setting mode than in the hall setting mode. In addition, the setting procedure is set more complicatedly in the operating days variation setting mode than in the hall setting mode and the base information setting mode.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the information setting process (S701) of FIG. In the information setting process, on the basis of signals from the clear switch 912, the effect switch 354, and the operation button 120, the three operation means of the clear switch 912, the effect switch 354, and the operation button 120 are simultaneously turned on. It is determined whether or not power has been turned on in a state in which these are simultaneously turned on (S921). If it is determined in S921 that the power is not turned on in the on state at the same time, the process proceeds to S923 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S921 that the power has been turned on in the ON state at the same time, the operation day change setting process for performing the process in the operation day change setting mode is executed (S922), and the process returns. The contents of the working days change setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S921 that the power is not turned on in the on state at the same time and the process proceeds to step S923, the clear switch is turned on based on the signals from the clear switch 912, the effect switch 354, and the operation button 120. 912 and the effect switch 354 are turned on at the same time, and it is determined whether or not the operation buttons 120 are not operated at the same time. It is determined whether or not the insertion has been performed (S923). In S923, when it is determined that the power is not turned on with the two operating means turned on simultaneously, the process proceeds to S925 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S923 that the power has been turned on with the two operating means turned on at the same time, the base information setting process for performing the processing in the base information setting mode is executed (S924). Return. The contents of the base information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S923, when it is determined that the power has not been turned on with the two operating means turned on at the same time and the process proceeds to S925, the signals from the clear switch 912, the effect switch 354, and the operation button 120 are displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the clear switch 912 is in the on state and the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354 are not in operation, so that only the clear switch 912 is in the on state. It is determined whether or not the insertion has been performed (S925). If it is determined in S925 that only the clear switch 912 is in the on state and the power is not turned on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S925 that the power is turned on while only the clear switch 912 is turned on, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on (S926). The time after the power is turned on is measured based on measuring the elapsed time from the time the power is turned on by a predetermined timer (not shown). Therefore, in S926, a determination is made with reference to such a timer value. If it is determined in S926 that 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S926 that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the power was turned on, it is determined whether or not the operation button 120 has been turned on based on the signal from the operation button 120 and the on-state has been turned on. It is determined whether or not the operation button 120 has been turned on for 5 seconds or more after the power is turned on based on counting the operation continuation time by a predetermined timer (not shown) (S927). If it is determined that the operation button 120 has not been turned on for more than 5 seconds, the process returns to S926. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 120 has been turned on for 5 seconds or more, the hole setting process for performing the process in the hole setting mode is executed (S928), and the process returns.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the hole setting process (S928) executed by the information setting process. In the working day change setting process, first, the hall setting mode screen as described above is displayed (S501). Then, when the hall setting mode screen is displayed, it is determined whether or not there has been a selection operation for selecting an item as described above by checking the operation signal from the operation signal from the operation button 120 (S502). ). If it is determined in S502 that the selection operation has been performed, display corresponding to the operation is performed, for example, the selected region is displayed in a selection notification color (S503), and the process returns to S502. On the other hand, if it is determined in S502 that there is no selection operation, the currently selected operation area is confirmed on the hall setting mode screen, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed to select the golden time setting screen. It is determined whether or not there has been an operation for determining (S504).

  If it is determined in S504 that there is no operation for determining selection of the golden time setting screen, the process proceeds to S511 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S504 that there is an operation for determining selection of the golden time setting screen, the golden time setting screen shown in FIG. 21 is displayed (S505). Then, by confirming the operation signal from the operation button 120 and the operation signal from the effect switch 354, it is determined whether or not there has been a selection / setting operation such as the operation region selection operation and the execution time setting operation as described above. Judgment is made (S506). When it is determined in S506 that the selection / setting operation has been performed, as described above, the display of the selected area in the selection notification color and the display of the check mark in the check box correspond to the operation. Display is performed (S507), and the process returns to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined in S506 that there has been no selection / setting operation, the operation area currently selected on the golden time setting screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed, as described above. It is determined whether or not a setting end operation has been performed (S508).

  If it is determined in S508 that a setting end operation has been performed, the information set on the golden time setting screen at that time is stored in the backup RAM 356 (S509), and the process returns. As a result, the hole setting mode ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S508 that the setting end operation has not been performed, the operation area currently selected on the golden time setting screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed to return as described above. It is determined whether or not there is an operation (S510). If it is determined in S510 that there is a return operation, the process returns to S501 without saving the information set on the golden time setting screen at that time in the backup RAM 356. Thereby, a hall setting mode screen is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S510 that there is no return operation, the process returns to S506.

  If it is determined in S504 that there is no operation for determining selection of the golden time setting screen, the currently selected operation area is confirmed on the hall setting mode screen, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed. Thus, it is determined whether or not there has been an operation for determining selection of the almighty symbol setting screen (S511).

  If it is determined in S511 that there is no operation for determining selection of the almighty symbol setting screen, the process proceeds to S502 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined in S511 that there is an operation for determining selection of the almighty symbol setting screen, the almighty symbol setting screen shown in FIG. 22 is displayed (S512). Then, by confirming the operation signal from the operation button 120 and the operation signal from the effect switch 354, it is determined whether or not there has been a selection / setting operation such as an operation region selection operation and a time setting operation as described above. (S513). When it is determined in S513 that the selection / setting operation has been performed, as described above, the display corresponding to the operation such as the display of the selected area in the selection notification color and the display of the check mark in the check box is performed. Display is performed (S514), and the process returns to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined in S506 that there has been no selection / setting operation, the operation area currently selected on the almighty symbol setting screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed, as described above. It is determined whether or not a setting end operation has been performed (S515).

  When it is determined in S515 that the setting end operation has been performed, the information set on the almighty symbol setting screen at that time is stored in the backup RAM 356 (S516), and the process returns. As a result, the hole setting mode ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S515 that the setting end operation has not been performed, the operation area currently selected on the almighty symbol setting screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed to return as described above. It is determined whether or not there is an operation (S517). If it is determined in S517 that there is a return operation, the process returns to S501 without saving the information set in the almighty symbol setting screen at that time in the backup RAM 356. Thereby, a hall setting mode screen is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S517 that there is no return operation, the process returns to S513.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the base information setting process (S924) executed by the information setting process. In the base information setting process, first, the base information setting mode screen shown in FIG. 23 is displayed (S541). Then, when the table information setting mode screen is displayed, it is determined whether or not there has been a selection operation for selecting an item as described above by checking the operation signal from the operation signal from the operation button 120 ( S542). If it is determined in S542 that the selection operation has been performed, display corresponding to the operation is performed, for example, the selected region is displayed in a selection notification color (S543), and the process returns to S542. On the other hand, when it is determined in S542 that the selection operation has not been performed, the currently selected operation area is confirmed on the table information setting mode screen, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed, so that the date and time resetting screen is displayed. It is determined whether or not there has been an operation for determining selection (S544).

  If it is determined in S544 that there is no operation for determining the selection of the date / time reset screen, the process proceeds to S554 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S544 that there has been an operation for determining selection of the date / time reset screen, the date / time reset screen shown in FIG. 24 is displayed (S545). Then, by confirming the operation signal from the operation button 120 and the operation signal from the effect switch 354, it is determined whether or not the selection / setting operation as described above has been performed (S546). If it is determined in S546 that the selection / setting operation has been performed, the display corresponding to the operation such as the display of the selected area in the selection notification color and the setting display of numerical data is performed as described above. (S547), the process returns to S546. On the other hand, when it is determined in S546 that there has been no selection / setting operation, the operation area currently selected on the date / time resetting screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed, as described above. It is determined whether or not a time setting operation has been performed (S548).

  If it is determined in S548 that the time setting operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to S553 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S548 that the time setting operation has been performed, the above-described operation confirmation image is displayed (S549). Then, the operation area currently selected on the date / time reset screen is confirmed again, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed to determine again whether or not the time setting operation as described above has been performed ( S550). If it is determined in S550 that a time setting operation has been performed, information related to the time value set on the date / time resetting screen at that time is stored in the backup RAM 356 (S549), and the process returns. As a result, the base information setting mode ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S550 that the time setting operation has not been performed, the operation area currently selected on the date and time reset screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed, thereby canceling as described above. It is determined whether or not there is an operation (S552). If it is determined in S552 that a cancel operation has been performed, the process returns to S546 described above. As a result, the operation is redone. On the other hand, when it is determined in S552 that there is no cancel operation, the process returns to S550.

  If it is determined in S548 that the time setting operation has not been performed, it is determined whether or not the cancel operation has been performed (S553). If it is determined in S553 that there is no cancel operation, the process returns to S546 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined in S553 that the cancel operation has been performed, the process returns to S541 described above. This returns to the display of the table information setting mode screen.

  If it is determined in S544 that there is no operation for determining the selection of the date / time reset screen, the currently selected operation area is confirmed on the stand information setting mode screen, and an operation signal from the effect switch 354 is received. By confirming, it is determined whether or not there has been an operation for determining selection of the base information initialization screen (S554).

  When it is determined in S554 that there is no operation for determining selection of the base information initialization screen, the process proceeds to S564 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S554 that there is an operation for determining selection of the base information initialization screen, the base information initialization screen shown in FIG. 25 is displayed (S555). Then, by confirming the operation signal from the operation button 120 and the operation signal from the effect switch 354, it is determined whether or not there has been a selection operation as described above (S556). If it is determined in S556 that the selection operation has been performed, as described above, display corresponding to the operation, such as display of the selected area in the selection notification color, is performed (S557), and the process returns to S556. On the other hand, when it is determined in S556 that the selection operation has not been performed, the operation area currently selected on the stand information initialization screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed to thereby perform the initial operation as described above. It is determined whether or not there has been a digitizing operation (S558).

  If it is determined in S558 that the initialization operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to S563 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S548 that the initialization operation has been performed, the above-described operation confirmation image is displayed (S559). Then, the operation area currently selected on the stand information initialization screen is confirmed again, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed to determine again whether or not the initialization operation as described above has been performed. (S560). If it is determined in S560 that the initialization operation has been performed, the operation start date / time information stored in the operation start date / time storage area of the backup RAM 356 is initialized, and the operation day information is initialized to “0”. The information is stored in the backup RAM 356 and the process returns. As a result, the base information setting mode ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S550 that the initialization operation has not been performed, the operation area currently selected on the table information initialization screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed, as described above. It is determined whether or not a cancel operation has been performed (S562). If it is determined in S562 that a cancel operation has been performed, the process returns to S556 described above. As a result, the operation is redone. On the other hand, when it is determined in S562 that there is no cancel operation, the process returns to S560.

  If it is determined in S558 that the initialization operation has not been performed, the operation area currently selected on the stand information initialization screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed to confirm the above-described operation area. It is determined whether or not such a cancel operation has been performed (S563). If it is determined in S563 that there is no cancel operation, the process returns to S556 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined in S563 that the cancel operation has been performed, the process returns to S541 described above. This returns to the display of the table information setting mode screen.

  If it is determined in S554 that there is no operation for determining the selection of the stand information initialization screen, the operation area currently selected on the stand information initialization screen is confirmed, and an operation signal from the effect switch 354 is displayed. By confirming, it is determined whether or not there has been an end operation to end the display of the table information setting mode screen because the operation area 966 has been selected and determined (S564). If it is determined in S564 that no end operation has been performed, the process returns to S542 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in S564 that an end operation has been performed, the process returns. As a result, the base information setting mode ends.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the working day change setting process (S922) executed by the information setting process. In the working day change setting process, first, the working day change mode screen shown in FIG. 26 is displayed (S581). Then, when the operation day change mode screen is displayed, the operation signal from the operation button 120 and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 are confirmed, so that the operation region selection operation and the time value setting as described above are performed. It is determined whether or not there has been a selection / setting operation such as an operation (S582). When it is determined in S582 that the selection / setting operation has been performed, as described above, the display corresponding to the operation such as the display of the selected area in the selection notification color and the increase / decrease display of the number of working days is performed. (S583), it returns to S582. On the other hand, when it is determined in S582 that there has been no selection / setting operation, the operation area currently selected on the table information initialization screen is confirmed, and the operation signal from the effect switch 354 is confirmed as described above. It is determined whether or not there has been an end operation for ending the active working day change setting mode (S584). If it is determined in S584 that there is no end operation, the process returns to S582 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined in S584 that the end operation has been performed, the operation start date displayed at the time of the operation is updated and stored as the operation start date stored in the backup RAM 356, and the operation days are set. The display of the working day change setting mode screen ends. Return. As a result, the working day change setting mode ends. In the hall setting process, stand information setting process, and working day change setting process shown above, setting various information such as setting of production, setting of timekeeping value of date and time, setting of working days, etc. And initializing the data, and settings for adjusting the data can be made.

  Next, a display example when the above-described clock information disappearance notification is performed in the variable display device 9 by the information disappearance management process in S703A of FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 34 is a display screen diagram showing a display example when the above-mentioned clock information disappearance notification is performed in the variable display device 9 by the information disappearance management process. As shown in FIG. 34, when the clock information disappearance notification is performed, a display for notifying that the time count information of the real time clock 353 stored in the backup RAM 356 such as “clock information has disappeared” has disappeared. Is done.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the information disappearance management process (S703A) of FIG. In the information disappearance management process, it is determined whether or not the information disappearance flag is set (S1001). If it is determined in S1001 that the information disappearance flag is not set, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the information disappearance flag is set, the value of the aforementioned disappearance notification timer is updated (subtracted update), and the disappearance notification timer is timed up (the timer value becomes “0”). ) Is determined (S1003).

  When it is determined in S1003 that the disappearance notification timer has not expired, the clock information disappearance notification shown in FIG. 34 is executed and the process returns. Thus, the clock information disappearance notification is continuously executed during the period set in the disappearance notification timer. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that the disappearance notification timer has timed out, the execution of the clock information disappearance notification shown in FIG. . As a result, the clock information disappearance notification is terminated when the period set in the disappearance notification timer elapses. When the time count information of the real time clock 353 disappears, the information disappearance flag is not reset based on the passage of time, but thereafter the information disappears until the time count information of the real time clock 353 is reset. The information disappearance notification may be continued by setting a flag, and the information disappearance notification may be ended by resetting the information disappearance flag when the time count information is reset.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the notification content setting process (S704) in the effect control main process. In this embodiment, the notification content corresponds to the information notified to the player (information such as “recommended table”, “excellent table”, “amanail table”) and the information notified. Including production.

  In the notification content setting process, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the clock information disappearance flag indicating that the information of the real-time clock 353 has disappeared is set (S1740a). When the clock information disappearance flag is set, the process returns to prohibit the execution of the notification effect as described above based on the time value of the real time clock 353. On the other hand, when the clock information extinction flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the notification content setting prohibition flag for prohibiting the setting of the notification content is set (S1740). In this embodiment, as described later, notification content setting processing is prohibited for a predetermined period (notification content setting prohibition period). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls to set the notification content setting prohibition flag between the opening time (for example, 10:00) and the closing time (for example, 23:00) of the game hall, and sets the notification content. Prohibit execution of processing.

  If the notification content setting prohibition flag is not set (that is, not in the prohibition period of the notification content setting process), the production control microcomputer 100 has a notification content setting flag indicating that the notification content has already been set. It is confirmed whether it is set (S1741). If it is not set (that is, if the notification content is not set), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a detection signal is input from the operation button 120 (S 1742). That is, it is confirmed whether or not an operation for setting notification contents has been started by a store clerk or the like of the game hall.

  After the detection signal from the operation button 120 is input in S 1742, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the operation is during a game (for example, whether or not the operation is during a predetermined game effect or background screen selection). If the operation is not in the game, the process may proceed to S1743 and subsequent steps. Further, after inputting the detection signal from the operation button 120 in S 1742, the production control microcomputer 100 inputs time information from the real-time clock 353, and confirms that the current time is not the predetermined notification content setting prohibition period. The process may be shifted from S1743 to the process after S1743. By doing so, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on after the predetermined notification content setting prohibition period, the setting operation of the notification content during the notification content setting prohibition period is surely prohibited. be able to.

  When the detection signal is input from the operation button 120 (that is, when the setting operation of the notification content is started), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the notification content setting screen for prompting the setting operation of the notification content in a variable manner. It is displayed on the device 9 (S1743). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the notification content setting screen shown in FIG. 37A on the variable display device 9, and selects one of “recommended table”, “excellent table”, and “amanail table”. Encourage operation. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 waits until a detection signal is input from the operation button 120 (that is, until a notification content setting operation is performed by a game clerk or the like) (S1744). If the detection signal from the operation button 120 is not input until the notification content setting prohibition period is reached, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the notification content setting prohibition flag and also performs the notification content setting process. Exit.

  When the detection signal from the operation button 120 is input (Y in S1744), the production control microcomputer 100 selects the notification content according to the input detection signal (S1745). For example, an operator (game shop clerk, etc.) operates the operation button 120 to move the cursor on the notification content setting screen shown in FIG. 37, and “A. Recommended stand”, “B. Each time a selection operation for selecting and instructing one of “C. eel nails” is performed (the operation button 120 is pressed once (operation with a short pressing time of less than a predetermined time, such as less than 2 seconds), the cursor moves to 1). Move to change the selected item item by item). Next, the operator performs an operation (decision operation) for determining the selected notification content by pressing the operation button 120 continuously for a predetermined time such as 2 seconds or longer (so-called long press operation). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the notification content according to the operation of the operator. The determination operation described above may be performed by pressing the effect switch 354.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 stores in the predetermined announcement production information storage area the announcement production information that can identify the announcement production that announces the selected notification content (S1746). In this embodiment, a predetermined notification effect information storage area is secured in the backup RAM 356.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification effect information stored in S1746. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, when the notification content indicating that it is a recommended stand is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 provides the notification effect as notification effect information that can specify the notification effect indicating that it is the recommended stand. The identifier “K01” is stored in a predetermined notification effect information storage area. Further, for example, when the content of the notification indicating that it is an excellent stand is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the notification effect identifier “K02” as notification effect information that can specify the notification effect indicating that it is an excellent stand. The information is stored in a predetermined notification effect information storage area. For example, when the notification content indicating that it is an Ama nail base is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the notification effect identifier “K03” as the notification effect information that can specify the notification effect indicating that it is an Ama nail base. The information is stored in a predetermined notification effect information storage area.

  As a result of the above processing, information to be notified to the player (information such as “Recommended stand”, “Good stand”, “Ama nail stand”) and effects corresponding to the information to be notified are selected. And stored as notification effect information.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the time for automatically deleting the notification content set in S1746 (notification content deletion time) (S1747). In this embodiment, based on the notification content deletion time set in S1747, even if the notification content is not deleted during the game, the notification content is automatically deleted at the game store closing time (for example, 23:00). Is done. In addition, when the setting time of the notification content is recorded based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353 instead of the closing time of the game hall, for example, it is detected that a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification content was set The notification content may be automatically deleted. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may automatically set the notification content deletion time so that the notification content is automatically deleted 24 hours after the time when the notification content setting flag is set. Further, instead of setting a predetermined notification content deletion time, the notification content deletion time may be selected from a plurality of times. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a notification content erasing time selection screen including a plurality of times on the variable display device 9, and based on a detection signal from the operation button 120, by a store clerk or the like in the game hall The selected time may be set as the notification content erasing time. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the notification content setting flag (S1748) and ends the process.

  If the notification content setting prohibition flag is set in S1740 (that is, during the prohibition period of the notification content setting process), the production control microcomputer 100 from the storage area (time value data storage area) of the backup RAM 356, The current time information (hour, minute, second) is input from the time count data of the real time clock 353 (S1749). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the current time is a predetermined period (a prohibited period for the notification content setting process) based on the input current time information (S1750). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the current time is a period from the opening time (10:00) of the game hall to the closing time (23:00). If the current time is a predetermined period, the process is terminated as it is. If the current time is not a predetermined period (that is, if it is not the prohibition period of the notification content setting process), the production control microcomputer 100 resets the notification content setting prohibition flag (S1751) and ends the process.

  If the notification content setting flag is set in S1741 (that is, if the notification content has already been set), the production control microcomputer 100 reads the real-time clock from the storage area of the backup RAM 356 (time value data storage area). Current time information (hour, minute, second) is input from the time count data of 353 (S1752). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the current time is a predetermined period (a prohibited period for the notification content setting process) based on the input current time information (S1753). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the current time is a period from the opening time (10:00) of the game hall to the closing time (23:00). If the current time is not the predetermined time, the flow shifts to S1755. If the current time is a predetermined period (that is, if the notification content setting process is prohibited), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a notification content setting prohibition flag (S1754).

  In this embodiment, as an example, a case will be described in which the predetermined period (the period during which the notification content setting process is prohibited) is the period from the game hall opening time (10:00) to the closing time (23:00). For example, a plurality of predetermined periods may be provided without being limited to the period shown in this embodiment. Then, when it is determined that the current time corresponds to one of a plurality of predetermined periods, the production control microcomputer 100 may set a notification content setting prohibition flag.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the current time is a predetermined notification content erasing time (for example, 23:00, which is the closing time of the game hall) (S1755). If the current time is not a predetermined notification content erasing time, the process ends. If the current time is a predetermined notification content deletion time, the production control microcomputer 100 deletes the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area (S1756) and resets the notification content setting flag (S1756). S1757).

  When the detection signal from the operation button 120 is not input in S 1742 (that is, when the notification content setting operation is not performed), the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the storage area of the backup RAM 356 (time value data). The current time information (hour, minute, second) is input from the time-measured data of the real-time clock 353 from the storage area (S1758). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the current time is a predetermined period (a period during which the notification content setting process is prohibited) based on the input current time information (S1759). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the current time is a period from the opening time (10:00) of the game hall to the closing time (23:00). If the current time is not a predetermined time, the process is terminated as it is. If the current time is a predetermined period (that is, if the notification content setting process is prohibited), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a notification content setting prohibition flag (S1760) and ends the process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the notification content is set based on the detection signal from the operation button 120. For example, on / off from the effect switch 354 provided on the lamp driver board 35 is shown. The content of notification may be set based on the signal.

  In this embodiment, the case where the notification content can be set only once during the period during which the notification content can be set (a period other than the prohibition period of the notification content setting process) is shown. You may comprise so that the setting of notification content can be changed any number of times within the period which can be set. In this case, for example, in the notification content setting process shown in FIG. 36, if the notification content setting prohibition flag is not set in S1740, the process proceeds to S1742 without performing S1741, and the notification content setting is prohibited in S1760. The processing of S1752 to S1757 may be executed after the flag is set.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process (S705) in the effect control main process. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (S1611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (S1612).

  If the command read in S1612 is a variation pattern designation effect control command (variation pattern command) (S1613), the effect control microcomputer 100 saves the variation pattern indicated in the received variation pattern command (S1614). . Specifically, the EXT data of the command is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a variation pattern reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received (S1615). The variation pattern command is transmitted based on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process (see S301) by the game control microcomputer 560.

  If the command read in S1612 is a display result command (S1616), the production control microcomputer 100 saves the display result indicated in the received display result command (S1617). Specifically, the EXT data of the command is stored in the display result data storage area in the RAM. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display result reception flag indicating that the display result command has been received (S1618). The display result command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (see S29) based on the effect designation value set in the effect symbol information buffer in the special symbol normal process (see S300) by the game control microcomputer 560. The

  If the command read in S1612 is a fanfare-designated effect control command (fanfare command) (S1619), the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the EXT data of the command in the fanfare data storage area in the RAM ( In step S1620, a fanfare flag indicating that the fanfare command has been received is set (S1621). The fanfare command is transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 in a special symbol stop process (see S303).

  If the command read in S1612 is an ending-designated presentation control command (ending command) (S1622), the presentation control microcomputer 100 stores the EXT data of the command in the ending data storage area in the RAM ( In step S1623, an ending flag indicating that the ending command has been received is set (S1624). The ending command is transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 in the big hit end process (see S307).

  If the command read in S1612 is a demonstration display command (S1625), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a demonstration display reception flag indicating that the demonstration display command has been received (S1626), and returns to S1611. . If it is determined that the command is not a demonstration display command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a date / time command (S1627).

  If it is determined that the command is a date / time command, the type of received date / time command (second command, minute command, hour command, day command, day command, month command, year based on the first byte data of the received date command) A date and time command reception flag, which is a reception flag that can specify the command and the type of transmission end command), is set (S1628). Based on the second byte data of the received date / time command, the date / time data indicated by the received date / time command is stored as received data in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 85 (S1629), and the process returns to S1611.

  If the received command is another command other than the above-described commands, it is determined what command the received command is, a command reception flag corresponding to the received command is set (S1630), and the process returns to S1611. That is, S1630 collectively shows processes corresponding to reception of various commands other than the above-described variation pattern command, display result command, fanfare designation command, ending designation command, demonstration display command, and date / time command. For example, when the received command is a decorative symbol stop designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a decorative symbol stop designation reception flag indicating that the decorative symbol stop designation command has been received.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the demonstration display process (S706) in the effect control main process. In the demonstration display process, the production control microcomputer 100 performs one of S760 and S761 according to the value of the demonstration display process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Demo display start process (S760): The demonstration display effect is started based on the reception of the demo display command. In this case, it is confirmed whether or not the current time is a predetermined special demonstration execution time. If the current time is not a predetermined special demonstration execution time, a normal demonstration display effect is started. If the current time is a predetermined special demonstration execution time, a special demonstration display effect is started.

  Demo display processing (S761): The demonstration display effect is continuously executed based on the reception of the demo display command. If the demonstration display command has not been received, the demonstration display effect ends. When the demonstration display effect is continuously executed, and when the special demonstration display effect is being executed, the special demonstration display effect is continuously executed as it is. When a normal demonstration display effect is being executed, it is confirmed whether or not the current time is a predetermined special demonstration execution time. If the current time is not a predetermined special demonstration execution time, the normal demonstration display effect is continuously executed as it is, and if the current time is the predetermined special demonstration execution time, the effect is switched to a special demonstration display effect.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a demo display start process (S760) in the demo display process. In the demonstration display start process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the demonstration display reception flag is set (S7601). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the demonstration display reception flag (S7602). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the clock information disappearance flag indicating that the information of the real time clock 353 as described above has disappeared is set (S7603a). When the clock information disappearance flag is set, the process proceeds to S7605 to be described later in order to prohibit the execution of the effect based on the time value of the real time clock 353. On the other hand, when the clock information extinction flag is not set, the current time information (hour, minute, second) is read from the data of the time value of the real-time clock 353 from the storage area (time value data storage area) of the backup RAM 356. (S7603). Then, by referring to the data of the special demonstration display selected time stored in the backup RAM 356 and the data of the special demonstration display fixed time stored in the ROM 84, the current time information is input based on the input current time information. It is confirmed whether or not the time is a predetermined special demonstration execution time (special demonstration display execution time) (S7604).

  If it is not the predetermined special demonstration execution time, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the production of the normal demonstration display (S7605). If it is a predetermined special demonstration execution time, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the production of the special demonstration display in the production mode different from the production of the normal demonstration display (S7606), and the special The special demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration display effect is executed is set (S7607).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the selected process data 1 to the process timer and starts the process timer (S7608). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control is executed (S7609). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts a demonstration display effect (a normal demonstration display effect or a special demonstration display effect) by displaying a predetermined moving image using the variable display device 9.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the demonstration display process flag to a value indicating the demonstration display process (S761) (S7610).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the demo display process (S761) in the demo display process. In the demonstration display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the demonstration display reception flag is set (S7651). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the demonstration display reception flag (S7652) and confirms whether the special demonstration display flag is set (S7653).

  If the special demonstration display flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 will display the current time information (hour, minute) from the time value data of the real time clock 353 from the storage area (time value data storage area) of the backup RAM 356. , Seconds) is read out and input (S7654a). Then, with reference to the special demo display selection time data stored in the backup RAM 356, the special demo display fixed time data stored in the ROM 84, and the input current time information, the current time is the latest. It is confirmed whether or not 10 minutes or more have elapsed from the special demo execution time (execution start time of special demo display) (S7654b).

  If it is determined in S7654b that 10 minutes or more have not elapsed, the flow shifts to S7654. In other words, the period during which the special demonstration display is executed is set to end when 10 minutes have elapsed from the special demonstration execution time, but at this point, 10 minutes have not yet elapsed, Continue to produce special demonstration displays. On the other hand, when it is determined in S7654b that 10 minutes or more have elapsed, the special demonstration display flag is reset (S7654c), and the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the normal demonstration display effect (S7654d). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the switched process data 1 to the process timer and starts the process timer (S7654e). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control is executed (S7654f), and the process returns. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts a normal demonstration display effect by displaying a predetermined moving image using the variable display device 9. In this way, the special demonstration display is terminated when 10 minutes have elapsed since the start. The special demonstration display may be controlled not to end based on the passage of time, but to end only when the start winning of the game ball is detected. Further, the special demonstration display may be controlled to be terminated when it is detected that the player has launched a game ball. As described above, the special demonstration display may be controlled to end based on a predetermined trigger other than the passage of time.

  If the special demonstration display flag is not set in S7653, it is a time when a normal demonstration display effect is executed, and the effect control microcomputer 100 indicates that the information of the real-time clock 353 as described above has disappeared. It is confirmed whether the clock information disappearance flag is set (S7659a). If the clock information disappearance flag is set, the process advances to step S7654 to prohibit execution of a special demonstration display. On the other hand, when the clock information extinction flag is not set, the current time information (hour, minute, second) is read from the data of the time value of the real-time clock 353 from the storage area (time value data storage area) of the backup RAM 356. (S7659). The current time is determined based on the input current time information by referring to the data of the selected time of the special demo display stored in the backup RAM 356 and the data of the fixed time of the special demo display stored in the ROM 84. It is confirmed whether or not it is a predetermined special demonstration execution time (execution time of special demonstration display) (S7660).

  If it is not the predetermined special demonstration execution time, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to S7654. That is, since the current time is not a predetermined special demonstration execution time, when the effect of the normal demonstration display is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the effect of the normal demonstration display as it is.

  If it is a predetermined special demonstration execution time, the production control microcomputer 100 switches to the process data corresponding to the special demonstration display production in the production mode different from the normal demonstration display production (S7661).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the switched process data 1 to the process timer and starts the process timer (S7662). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 follows the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, and sound number data 1). Control is executed (S7663). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts a special demonstration display effect by displaying a predetermined moving image using the variable display device 9. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a special demonstration display flag (S7664) and ends the process.

  In S7654, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the process timer (S7654). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data n (S7655). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 continuously executes a demonstration display effect (a normal demonstration display effect or a special demonstration display effect) by displaying a predetermined moving image using the variable display device 9. To do.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S7656). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S7657). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, the process timer is started (S7658), and the process ends. That is, S7654 to S7658 are steps that are executed in both the demonstration of the normal demonstration display and the demonstration of the special demonstration display, and execute the demonstration display.

  If the demonstration display flag is not set in S7651 described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the special demonstration display flag is set (S7665a). When it is determined that the special demonstration display flag is not set, the value of the demonstration display process flag is updated to a value indicating the demonstration display start process (S760) (S7665). That is, since it is possible to start fluctuation or the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the demonstration display command is not received from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the demonstration display effect. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration display flag is set in S7665a, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the special demonstration display flag (S7665b). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 reads and inputs the current time information (hour, minute, second) out of the time value data of the real-time clock 353 from the storage area (time value data storage area) of the backup RAM 356 ( S7665c). Then, with reference to the special demo display selection time data stored in the backup RAM 356, the special demo display fixed time data stored in the ROM 84, and the input current time information, the current time is the latest. It is confirmed whether or not 10 minutes or more have elapsed since the special demonstration execution time (S7665d).

  If it is determined in S7665d that 10 minutes or more have elapsed, the process proceeds to S7665 described above, the value of the demo display process flag is updated to a value indicating the demo display start process (S760), and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S7665d that 10 minutes or more have not elapsed, a mission start flag used as a flag for starting the mission effect is set (S7665e), and the data of the mission effect start time is read out in S7665c. The current time information is stored in the RAM 85 (S7665f). Then, the process proceeds to S7665 described above, the value of the demonstration display process flag is updated to a value indicating the demonstration display start process (S760), and the process returns. As a result, when the variation can be started during the 10-minute execution period of the special demonstration display, the mission effect is performed in the variation display. On the other hand, after the execution period of the special demonstration display has elapsed, the variation starts. When it becomes possible, the mission effect is not performed in the variable display.

  By executing the above processing, in this embodiment, a special demonstration different from the effect of the normal demonstration display is performed at a predetermined special demonstration execution time based on the current time information input from the backup RAM 356. Produce the display. By doing so, for example, when the presentation is performed simultaneously on the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 as shown in FIG. 8 based on the time counted by the real-time clock 353, the demonstration display start timing and further By visually confirming the synchronization of the operations, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a difference in the time measured by the real time clock 353 between the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. Therefore, it is possible to take processing for the time lag timed by the real-time clock 353 based on the visual confirmation result, and the production execution timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is increased without increasing the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect of presentation to the player is reduced.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S707) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs any one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation effect control command (variation pattern command) has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a flag (variation pattern reception flag) indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is set when it is confirmed in the command analysis process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 that an effect control command for designating a variation pattern for a decorative symbol in the variation display device 9 has been received (S1615). reference).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer setting value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time.

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing (S803): In response to receiving the decoration symbol stop designation command, control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and derive and display the stop symbol (deterministic symbol). If the decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be received, control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display processing (S804): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed.

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, a display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  The process data shown in FIG. 44 is stored in the ROM 84 of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  45 and 46 are flowcharts showing the variation pattern command reception wait process (S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (S1801). If it is set, the flag is reset (S1802).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received variation pattern command is designated to be off (S1803). If it is specified to be out, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random symbol for determining the off symbol (S1804), and based on the value of the random symbol for determining the off symbol, the stop symbol of the left middle right decorative symbol corresponding to the off symbol is displayed. Is determined (S1805). Then, the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is stored in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM (S1806).

  If the received variation pattern command is not an out-of-order designation, the production control microcomputer 100 reads the current date and time information (day, The day of the week, hour, minute, second) is read and input (S1807). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the received variation pattern command is a normal jackpot designation (S1808). If the normal big hit is designated, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a normal big hit production flag indicating that the normal big hit is designated (S1809). Then, it is checked whether or not the clock information disappearance flag indicating that the information of the real-time clock 353 has disappeared is set (S1809a). When the clock information extinction flag is set, the process proceeds to S1813, which will be described later, in order to prohibit the execution of effects based on the time value of the real-time clock 353. On the other hand, when the clock information extinction flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the current date and time is a predetermined symbol change period based on the current date and time information input in S1807 (S1810). As described above, the symbol change period includes the execution date information (stored information in the backup RAM 356) that can be set using the almighty symbol setting screen and the execution date based on the almighty symbol fixed date data stored in the ROM 358. This is a period determined based on the information and information on the execution time (a time zone from 12:00 to 13:00 as will be described later) stored in the ROM 358. Therefore, in S1810, these pieces of information specifying the symbol change period are read from the backup RAM 356 and ROM 358, and it is confirmed whether or not the current date and time is a predetermined symbol change period.

  Of the information indicating the symbol change period, the execution date information by the almighty symbol fixed date data and the execution time information may be stored in the ROM 84 and can be arbitrarily set using the almighty symbol setting screen. In this way, it may be stored in the backup RAM 356. The predetermined symbol change period is not limited to setting the day and time, but may be set as a specific time every day.

  In this embodiment, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the normal decorative symbols using symbols from “1” to “9” and predetermined symbols in addition to the symbols from “1” to “9” are used. One of the special decorative symbol variations using the almighty symbol is executed. The almighty symbol is a symbol used equivalently to all symbols (for example, symbols from “1” to “9”) used for normal decoration symbol variation. For example, when performing special decorative symbol variation using an almighty symbol, if one of the left and right display areas on the variation display device 9 is stopped and displayed in an almighty symbol, the other is changed from “1” to “ Even if the display is stopped for any symbol up to “9”, the reach state is established. In this case, for example, when the left display area is stopped and displayed with the symbol “7” and the right display area is stopped and displayed with the almighty symbol, the reach display mode is finally reached. If the display is stopped at "7", a big hit symbol is displayed. Further, for example, when performing special decoration symbol variation using an almighty symbol, the reach state is also reached when both the left and right display areas in the variation display device 9 are stopped and displayed with the almighty symbol. In this case, even if the display area in the middle is stopped and displayed at any symbol ("1" to "9"), the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  If the current date and time is a predetermined symbol change period, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a normal-time jackpot symbol determination table including an almighty symbol as a symbol determination table used to determine the jackpot symbol of the decoration symbol. (S1811), an almighty selection flag indicating that the decorative symbol variation including the almighty symbol is selected is set (S1812).

  In this embodiment, when performing normal decoration symbol variation, a jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpot (a table for determining jackpot symbol determination at the time of probability variation) used when determining a probability variation symbol, and a normal jackpot A jackpot display symbol determination table for normal jackpot (a normal jackpot symbol determination table) is prepared in advance. A number of decision values are assigned to each probability variation symbol in the probability change big hit symbol determination table, and a plurality of decision values are assigned to each non-probability variation symbol in the normal time big hit symbol determination table. ing. In addition, when performing special decorative symbol variations, a jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpots (a table for determining jackpot symbols with probability variation with almighty) used when determining probability variation symbols including almighty symbols, and almighty symbols are included. A normal big hit display symbol determination table for normal big hit (a normal big hit symbol determination table with almighty) is prepared in advance. Multiple determination values are assigned to the probability change big hit symbol determination table with almighty in association with each probability change symbol, and the normal big hit symbol determination table with almighty has a plurality of determinations in association with each non-probability change symbol. A value has been allocated. Such various symbol determination tables are stored in the ROM 84 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  If the current date and time is not the predetermined symbol change period, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the normal-time jackpot symbol determination table as the symbol determination table used to determine the jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol (S1813). If it is determined in S1810 that the current date and time is not the predetermined symbol change period, if the almighty selection flag has already been set, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the almighty selection flag and proceeds to S1813.

  If the received variation pattern command is not normally jackpot designation, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation jackpot is designated (S1814). If the probability variation jackpot is specified, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a probability variation jackpot effect flag indicating that the probability variation jackpot is designated (S1815). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the clock information disappearance flag indicating that the information of the real time clock 353 as described above has disappeared is set (S1816a). When the clock information disappearance flag is set, the process proceeds to S1819 described later in order to prohibit the execution of the effect based on the time value of the real time clock 353. On the other hand, when the clock information extinction flag is not set, it is confirmed based on the current time information input in S1807 whether or not the current date and time is a predetermined symbol change period as in S1810 described above (S1816). ).

  If the current date and time is a predetermined symbol change period, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a probability change jackpot symbol determination table including an almighty symbol as a symbol determination table used for determining the jackpot symbol of the decoration symbol. (S1817), an almighty selection flag is set (S1818).

  In addition, the decorative symbol variation using the almighty symbol may be performed only in the case of the probability variable big hit designation, instead of performing the decorative symbol variation in both the normal big hit designation and the probability variation big hit designation. In this case, if the production control microcomputer 100 determines Y in S1808, it may simply move to S1813 without performing the processes of S1810 to S1812 after executing S1809. Further, the symbol change period may be different between S1810 and S1816.

  If the current date and time is not the predetermined symbol change period, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the probability change jackpot symbol determination table as the symbol determination table used for determining the jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol (S1819). If it is determined in S1816 that the current date and time is not the predetermined symbol change period, if the almighty selection flag has already been set, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the almighty selection flag and proceeds to S1819.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the jackpot symbol determining random number, and the left middle right decoration corresponding to the jackpot based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number and the selected symbol determining table. The stop symbol of the symbol is determined (S1820).

  In S1820, when the probability change big hit symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table as a decorative symbol stop symbol (for example, the left, middle, and right symbols). So that the symbols are aligned with the same odd number of symbols). In addition, when the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table as a non-probable variable symbol (for example, left middle right symbol) as a decorative symbol stop symbol. So that the symbols are aligned with the same even number of symbols).

  In addition, when the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table with almighty is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the probability variation symbol including the almighty symbol as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol based on the selected symbol determination table. To do. For example, it is determined that any two of the left middle right symbols are the same odd number symbols and the other one is an almighty symbol. Further, it is determined that any one of the left middle right symbols becomes an odd number symbol and the other two become almighty symbols.

  In addition, when the normal big hit symbol determination table with almighty is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table to display a non-probable variable symbol including an almighty symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol. decide. For example, it is determined that any two of the left middle right symbols are the same even number and the other one is an almighty symbol. Further, it is determined that any one of the left middle right symbols becomes an even symbol and the other two become almighty symbols.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol determination table. As shown in FIG. 47A, when the normal big hit symbol determination table with almighty is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 displays “22 ALL” or “44 ALL” as non-probability variable symbols including almighty symbols. ”,“ 66 ALL ”,“ 88 ALL ”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47B, when the normal-time big hit symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses “222”, “444”, “666”, “ “888” is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47C, when the probability variation big hit symbol determination table with almighty is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses “11 ALL” and “33” as probability variation symbols including the almighty symbol. ALL "," 55ALL "," 77 ALL "," 99 ALL "are determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47D, when the probability variation big hit symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 selects “111”, “333”, “555”, “ 777 "and" 999 "are determined.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the determined decorative symbol stop symbol in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM (S1821).

  If the received variation pattern command is not the probability variation jackpot designation, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation jackpot designation is sudden (S1822). If the sudden probability change big hit is specified, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the sudden probability change big hit effect flag indicating that the sudden probability change big hit is specified (S1823), and proceeds to S1825.

  If the received variation pattern command is not suddenly a promiscuous big hit designation (in this case, the variation pattern command is a small hit designation), the production control microcomputer 100 shows a small hit presentation indicating that the small hit is designated. The flag is set (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1825.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly extracts a random number for determining the probability variation symbol (S1825). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the left middle right decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability variation big hit based on the value of the sudden probability variation design random number (S1826). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change big hit. And the stop symbol of the determined decorative design is stored in the decorative design storage area in RAM (S1827). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (S801) (S1828). In this embodiment, the combination of symbols such as “123” and “357”, which is the same as the sudden probability change big hit, even when the small hit is designated by executing the processing of S1824 to S1827. Will be determined.

  It should be noted that the decorative symbol stop symbol for the probable big hit, the normal big hit, and the small hit may be determined based on the fact that the display result command is received in the decorative symbol changing process described later. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the probability variation symbol (the state in which the left, right, and right ornament symbols are arranged in an odd number) as the stop symbol of the ornament symbol based on the reception of the probability variation jackpot designation display result command. May be. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a non-probable variation (a state in which the left, right, and right decorative symbols are evenly arranged) as the decorative symbol stop symbol based on the reception of the display result command with the normal jackpot designation. May be. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the off symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the off-designation display result command. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a display result command of sudden probability variation jackpot designation, and a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability variation jackpot. May be determined. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a display result command specifying the small hit, and the combination of symbols such as “123” and “357”, which are the same as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change big hit. May be determined. In this case, when the display result command cannot be received, the effect control microcomputer 100 suddenly displays the same symbols such as “123” and “357” as the decorative symbol stop symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change big hit. What is necessary is just to determine a combination.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined symbol change period is reached, a special decorative symbol variation using a predetermined almighty symbol in addition to the symbols “1” to “9” has been described. However, special decorative symbol variation using a special symbol other than the almighty symbol may be performed. For example, a special decorative symbol variation may be performed using a couple symbol equivalently used for any one of plural symbols (for example, two) from “1” to “9”.

  For example, a case will be described in which special decorative symbol variation is performed using a symbol that is a combination of “7” and “5” as a couple symbol. In this case, for example, when performing special decoration symbol variation using a couple symbol, if either one of the left and right display areas in the variation display device 9 is stopped and displayed as a couple symbol, the other is “5”. ”Or“ 7 ”, even if the display is stopped, the reach state is entered. In this case, for example, when the left display area is stopped and displayed with the symbol “7” and the right display area is stopped and displayed with the couple symbol, the reach display mode is finally set to “7”. If the display is stopped at “”, a big hit symbol is displayed. In addition, for example, when performing special decoration symbol variation using a couple symbol, the left and right display areas in the variation display device 9 are both stopped and displayed in a couple symbol pattern. In this case, even if the display area in the middle is finally stopped and displayed with either “5” or “7”, the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  In addition, for example, when a predetermined symbol change period is reached, a special decorative symbol variation using only an almighty symbol may be performed, or a special decorative symbol variation using only a couple symbol may be performed. Also good.

  Further, in this embodiment, when probability variation big hit or normal big hit is specified, a case where a special decorative symbol variation using an almighty symbol is performed within a predetermined symbol change period has been shown. When the variation pattern command specifies the deviation and the execution of reach production is specified, if it is a predetermined symbol change period, a special decorative symbol variation using an almighty symbol or a couple symbol should be performed. Also good. In addition, when a sudden probability big hit or small hit is specified, a special decorative symbol variation using an almighty symbol or a couple symbol may be performed within a predetermined symbol change period.

  It should be noted that each of the almighty symbol and the couple symbol as described above may be used in a format that is added to a commonly used decorative symbol, or may be used in a format that changes a commonly used decorative symbol.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether the mission flag is set (S820a). The mission-in-progress flag is a flag indicating that the mission effect is being executed after the mission effect is started based on the fact that the above-described mission start flag is set. When it is determined that the mission flag is set, the process proceeds to S8520b described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mission flag is not set, it is checked whether or not the mission start flag is set (S820c). When it is determined that the mission start flag is set, the process proceeds to S820d described later to start the mission effect.

  If it is determined that the mission start flag has not been set, the process for starting the mission start flag is not performed, and it is confirmed whether the almighty selection flag has been set (S820). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data for decoration design change including almighty design according to the change pattern of the design to be used (S821).

  In this embodiment, as process data according to the decorative pattern variation pattern when the mission effect is not performed, process data for almighty variation used when performing a special decorative symbol variation using the almighty symbol, and the game Process data for probability change used when the state is shifted to the probability change state, and normal process data used when the game state is a state other than the probability change state (normal state, sudden probability change big hit state, small hit state) And are used. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a process data for almighty variation, a process data for probability variation, or a process data for normal use to perform a special decoration variation using an almighty symbol. Is in a probabilistic state or when the gaming state is a state other than the probable state, a different background color (for example, “yellow” when performing special decorative symbol variation using an almighty symbol, “Red” and “Blue” in the normal state) are displayed, and the decorative symbol variation display is executed. In addition, by selecting process data for almighty variation, a decorative symbol variation display using almighty symbols in addition to the normal symbols “1” to “9” is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, as process data according to the decorative pattern variation pattern when the mission effect is performed, process data used at the start of the mission effect, process data used during execution after the start of the mission effect, Is used. For example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control selects a process data used at the start of the mission effect and a process data used during the execution of the mission effect, so that a background color different from that when the mission effect is not executed ( For example, “yellow” when using an almighty symbol, “red” when probabilistic, “blue” when normal, and “green” when performing missions) are displayed. Perform variable display. Further, by selecting the process data for starting the mission effect, a message indicating that the mission effect is started is displayed (for example, a display indicating the start of the mission effect such as “Golden Time”). At the same time, a message indicating the mission achievement condition is displayed (for example, a display indicating the mission achievement condition such as “specify a special character within 20 minutes”). When the mission effect is executed, the variation display of the decoration symbol using the normal symbols “1” to “9” is executed. However, the variation display of the decoration symbol using the almighty symbol may be performed. .

  If the almighty selection flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high-probability state background designation command is received as the background display designation command (S822). If received, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for probability change according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (S823). If not received (in this case, a background display designation command other than the high-probability state background designation command (a normal state background designation command or a sudden probability change state background designation command transmitted in S1533) has been received). The production control microcomputer 100 selects normal process data according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (S824).

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of process data for decorative symbol variation selected in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command. As shown in FIG. 49A, when the mission effect is not performed and the almighty selection flag is set, in S821, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern command to specify the variation including normal reach. In the case where the process is performed, the process data for decoration design variation (background color “yellow”) in the normal reach mode using the almighty design is selected. In addition, when the change specification including the super reach is specified by the change pattern command, the process data for the decoration pattern change (background color “yellow”) in the super reach mode using the almighty design is selected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49B, when the almighty selection flag is not set and the mission effect is not performed, when the high probability state background designation command is received, the effect control is performed in S823. When the normal variation designation (variation designation not including reach) is specified by the variation pattern command, the microcomputer 100 selects normal decoration pattern variation (background color “red”) process data. In addition, when a change including normal reach is specified by the change pattern command, the process data for decoration pattern change (background color “red”) in the normal reach mode is selected. In addition, when the change specification including super reach is specified by the change pattern command, process data for decoration design change (background color “red”) in the super reach mode is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 49C, when the mission effect is not performed, if the almighty selection flag is not set and the high probability state background designation command has not been received, the effect control is performed in S824. When the normal variation designation (variation designation not including reach) is performed by the variation pattern command, the microcomputer 100 selects normal decoration pattern variation (background color “blue”) process data. If the variation pattern command includes variation designation including normal reach, the process data for variation of decorative design (background color “blue”) in the normal reach mode is selected. In addition, when the change specification including super reach is specified by the change pattern command, the process data for the decorative design change (background color “blue”) in the super reach mode is selected.

  The process data for starting the mission effect and the process data for executing the mission effect when performing the mission effect are not shown, but the process for changing the decorative pattern (background color “green”) in the mission effect is omitted. Select data. If the variation pattern command includes variation designation including normal reach, process data for variation of decorative design (background color “green”) in the normal reach mode is selected. In addition, when a change including super reach is specified by the change pattern command, process data for decoration design change (background color “green”) in the super reach mode is selected. As described above, the process data for starting the mission effect includes data for displaying a message indicating that the mission effect is started and displaying a message indicating the mission achievement condition. ing.

  If it is determined in S820c that the mission start flag is set, the mission start flag is reset (S820d), and the process data for starting the mission effect is obtained in accordance with the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used. Select (S820e). Then, the mission flag is set (S820f), and the process proceeds to S825. Thereby, in the mission effect, at the time of the first variation display of decorative symbols, a message indicating that the mission effect starts and a message indicating the mission achievement condition are displayed, and the mission effect is performed. A background color different from that when it is not displayed will be displayed.

  If it is determined in S820a that the mission flag is set, the process data for executing the mission effect is selected according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (S820b), and the process proceeds to S825. . Thereby, in the mission effect, the background color different from that when the mission effect is not performed is displayed at the second and subsequent decorative pattern variation display. Note that the message indicating the mission achievement condition as described above may also be displayed during the second and subsequent decorative symbol variation display.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the selected process data 1 to the process timer and starts the process timer (S825). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control is executed (S826). For example, a control signal is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variation display device 9. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a variation time timer (a timer corresponding to the variation time of the decorative symbol) (S827). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation process (S802) (S828).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative pattern changing process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a decorative design stop designation command is received (S1851). The decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted in a special symbol stop process (see S303) executed by the game control microcomputer 560. If it has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (S803) (S1859). If the decorative symbol stop designation command has not been received, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (S1852). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (S803) (S1859).

  The production control microcomputer 100 shifts to the decorative symbol variation stopping process based on the elapse of the predetermined variation time, stops the decorative symbol variation display, and derives and displays the stopped symbol. In this embodiment, when receiving the decorative design stop designation command (confirmation command), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, and proceeds to the decorative design change stop processing. If the decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be received, it is determined that a predetermined variation time has elapsed based on the fact that the variation time timer has timed out, and the process proceeds to a decorative symbol variation stop process.

  Note that it is also possible to monitor only one of the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command or the time-out of the variable time timer, stop the decorative symbol variation display, and derive and display the stop symbol. Also, when monitoring only the reception of the decorative symbol stop command and stopping the decorative symbol variation display and deriving and displaying the stop symbol, the decorative symbol stop specification command could not be received even if the variation timed out. In such a case, in the processing of S1851 to S1859, the decorative symbol variation display may not be completely stopped, and the decorative symbol may be displayed in a shaking manner or the display in which the decorative symbol is slightly enlarged or reduced may be repeated.

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the process timer by 1 (S1853) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (S1854).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data n (S1855). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S1856). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S1857). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (S1858).

  Specifically, in S1855, the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data n, whereby the decorative display variable display is executed on the variable display device 9. In this case, when the decorative pattern variation using the almighty design is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the almighty design in addition to the designs from “1” to “9”. The change display of the symbol is performed.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a decorative symbol stop symbol is displayed is set (S1871). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to S1877. In this embodiment, as described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in S1876. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in S1878. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in S1871 is a stage where the fanfare effect is not yet executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in S1872 is repeated. The process proceeds to S1877 without executing.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the stored stop symbol (decoration symbol (out-of-line symbol), jackpot display symbol (including suddenly probable big hit symbol), small hit symbol (book) In the example, the control is executed to stop and display suddenly the same symbol as the probability variation big hit symbol) (S1872). Then, it is determined whether or not to display a big hit symbol (including a sudden probability variation big hit symbol) or a small hit symbol (S1873).

  In S1872, the big hit display symbol (including the sudden probability variation big hit symbol) or the small hit symbol (however, in this example, the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol) is not displayed (that is, the outlier symbol is displayed: S1873 N), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the above-mentioned mission flag is set (S1874a). If it is determined that the mission flag is set, the process proceeds to S1874. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mission flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the current time among the data of the time value of the real time clock 353 from the storage area (time value data storage area) of the backup RAM 356. Information (hour, minute, second) is read and input (S1874b). Then, referring to the mission effect start time data stored in S7665f and the input current time information, the current time is a predetermined time (20 minutes or more corresponding to the mission achievement condition) from the mission effect start time. It is confirmed whether or not it has elapsed (S1874c).

  If it is determined in S1874c that the predetermined time or more has not elapsed from the start time of the mission effect, the process proceeds to S1874. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1874c that a predetermined time or more has elapsed from the start time of the mission effect, the mission flag is reset (S1874d), and a message indicating that the mission has failed is displayed on the variable display device 9 ( S1874e). Then, the process proceeds to S1874.

  In S1874, a predetermined flag (for example, when a flag corresponding to a decorative symbol stop designation command is set, that flag) is reset (S1874), and the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a variable pattern command reception waiting process (S800). (S1875).

  In S1872, when a big hit symbol (including a sudden probability variation big hit symbol) or a small hit symbol is displayed (Y in S1873), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a stop symbol display flag (S1876) and the fanfare flag is set. It is confirmed whether it has been set (S1877). That is, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a fanfare command has been received. When the fanfare flag is set (Y in S1877), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the stop symbol display flag (S1878), and checks whether the small hit effect flag is set (S1879). . Further, if the small hit effect flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the sudden probability big hit effect flag is set (S1880).

  In S1880, if neither the sudden probability change big hit effect flag nor the small hit effect flag is set, process data corresponding to a normal fanfare effect is selected (S1883). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the above-described mission flag is set (S1884a).

  If it is determined in S1884a that the mission flag is not set, then the flow shifts to S1884. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mission flag is set, the mission flag is reset (S1884b), and the process proceeds to S1884. During the execution of the mission effect, the player can easily know that the mission has been achieved when the display result that is a big hit is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, the mission is achieved. The message indicating that it has been done is not displayed. During the execution of the mission effect, a message indicating that the mission has been achieved may be displayed when a display result that is a big hit is derived and displayed.

  In S1880, if the sudden probability change big hit effect flag is set (Y in S1880), process data corresponding to the fanfare effect for sudden probability change big hit is selected (S1882).

  If the small hit effect flag is set (Y in S1879), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a small hit display time measurement timer for measuring the execution time of the fanfare effect at the time of the small hit (S1881). , The process proceeds to S 1882, and the same process data as the process data corresponding to the fanfare effect for sudden probability change big hit is selected. In other words, in this embodiment, the fanfare effect is executed using the same process data in the case of sudden probability big hit and small hit. Then, the process timer is started (S1884), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S1885).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the small hit effect flag is set (S900). If the small hit effect flag is set, the process proceeds to S902 as it is. If the small winning effect flag is not set, the effect controlling microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open display command has been received is set (S901). ). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S902). The value of the measurement timer is decremented by 1 (S903). Next, when the small hit display time measurement timer is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the small hit display time measurement timer has timed out (S904). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the determination in S904 only when the small hit effect flag is set, and if the small hit effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to S905. Therefore, in cases other than small hits, Yes is not determined in the process of S904. If timed out, the process proceeds to S909, and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S909).

  When the small hit display time measurement timer is not set, or when the small hit display time timer has not timed out, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect device (variable display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) are executed (S905). For example, an effect of displaying a jackpot display symbol on the variable display device 9 and displaying a character, a character or the like indicating that the jackpot has occurred is executed. In this case, in the case of sudden probability change big hit or small hit, the fanfare effect is executed for a predetermined period according to the contents of the process data n for the same sudden probability change big hit.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S907). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S908).

  When the big prize opening opening flag is set (Y in S901), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the notification content setting flag is set (S910). If it is set (that is, if the notification content is set), the production control microcomputer 100 stores it in a predetermined notification production information storage area based on the content of the special winning opening opening display command. The effect during the round including the notification effect indicated in the notification effect information to be performed (the effect of executing the round display corresponding to the number of rounds) is selected (S911). The special winning opening open display command is transmitted by the gaming control microcomputer 560 in the special winning opening open process (see S305).

  If the notification content setting flag is not set (that is, if the notification content is not set), the production control microcomputer 100 includes a notification production based on the content of the display command during the big prize opening opening. A normal mid-round effect (effect that performs round display according to the number of rounds) is selected (S912).

  Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (S913), and the process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (S914). In this case, when the in-round effect including the notification effect is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the round including the notification effect based on the notification effect information stored in the notification content setting process (see S1746). Select process data according to performance. For example, when the notification effect identifier “K01” shown in FIG. 38 is stored as the notification effect information, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a process according to the in-round effect including the notification effect indicating that it is a recommended stand. Select data. Further, for example, when the notification effect identifier “K02” shown in FIG. 38 is stored as the notification effect information, the effect control microcomputer 100 responds to the effect during the round including the notification effect indicating that it is an excellent platform. Selected process data. Further, for example, when the notification effect identifier “K03” shown in FIG. 38 is stored as the notification effect information, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the round including the notification effect indicating that it is a lintel base. Select the corresponding process data.

  Then, the process timer is started (S915), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805) (S916).

  In this embodiment, a case has been described in which both a big hit (including a sudden probability change big hit) fanfare effect and a small hitting fanfare effect are executed in the big hit display processing. The display process may be provided separately from the jackpot display process. In this case, for example, if the small hit effect flag is set in the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the small hit display time measurement timer and suddenly increases the fanfare for sudden change of probability big hit. Process data corresponding to the effect is selected, and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display process. Then, the same processing as S902 to S909 is executed in the small hit display processing.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (S1901). When the ending flag is not set (N in S1901), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the flag for opening the big prize opening indicating that the display command for opening the big prize opening has been received is set. Confirmation is made (S1902). It is set in the command analysis process (see S1630) based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 560 has received the command after the special prize opening opening transmitted in the process after opening the special prize opening (see S306).

  When the flag after the big prize opening is not set (N in S1902), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1903), and the production device (variation) Control of the display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (S1904). For example, an effect of displaying a jackpot display symbol on the variable display device 9 and displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed. In this case, when the in-round effect including the notification effect is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the in-round effect including the notification effect. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a jackpot display symbol, characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like on the variable display device 9, as well as “recommended table”, “excellent table”, “amanail table”, and the like. A character string indicating the content of the notification is displayed. In addition, the production mode of the notification production is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of displaying a character string indicating the notification content on the variable display device 9, the notification content may be output by voice (for example, a voice “Recommended stand” is output). Moreover, while displaying the character string which shows notification content, you may make it output notification content by an audio | voice.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S1905), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (S1906). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (S1907).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in S1902 (Y in S1902), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the interval production (interval corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command after the big prize opening. A display effect) is selected (S1908). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (S1909), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (S1910). Then, the process timer is started (S1911), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806) (S1912). Note that if the game is suddenly a probable big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not switch to the process data corresponding to the interval effect in S1910 even if the display command is received after the special winning opening is opened. To control.

  When the ending flag is set in S1901 (Y in S1901), it is when an ending command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 first resets the ending flag (S1913), and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (S1914). The effect control microcomputer 100 starts an effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (S1915) and starts a process timer (S1916). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S807) (S1917).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the round post-processing (S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received is set (S1971). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in S1971), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1972), and the production device (variation) Control of the display device 9, speaker 27, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (S1973). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S1974). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S1975). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S1976).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in S1971), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the notification content setting flag is set (S1977). If it is set (that is, if the notification content is set), the production control microcomputer 100 stores it in a predetermined notification production information storage area based on the content of the special winning opening opening display command. The effect during the round including the notification effect indicated in the notification effect information to be performed (effect that performs round display according to the number of rounds) is selected (S1978).

  If the notification content setting flag is not set (that is, if the notification content is not set), the production control microcomputer 100 includes a notification production based on the content of the display command during the big prize opening opening. A normal effect during round (effect that performs round display according to the number of rounds) is selected (S1979). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (S1980), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (S1981). Then, the process timer is started (S1982), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805) (S1983).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (S971) and checks whether the effect period measurement timer has timed out (S972). The production period measurement timer is set during the round process (see S1915).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in S972), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S973), and the production device (variable display device) according to the contents of the process data n 9 and the speaker 27) are executed (S974). For example, by displaying that the jackpot ends or by displaying a predetermined character on the display screen of the variable display device 9 and displaying a sentence such as “See you!” As a character line, the jackpot is ended. Is notified.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S977).

  When the effect period measurement timer times out (Y in S972), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets predetermined flags such as a normal jackpot effect flag and a probability change jackpot effect flag (S978).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the notification content setting flag is set (S979). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 deletes the announcement production information stored in the predetermined announcement production information storage area (S980) and resets the announcement content setting flag (S981). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S982).

  Next, the effect aspect of the notification effect performed in the fluctuation | variation display apparatus 9 is demonstrated. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a notification effect executed in the variable display device 9. In FIG. 56, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3) (4) (5). In the example shown in FIG. 56, as a precondition, the information of “recommended stand” and the corresponding production are selected as the notification content in the notification content setting process (S704), and the game hall closing time is used as the notification content erasure time. It is assumed that 23:00 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 (1) and 56 (2), when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the variation display device 9 starts variation display of decorative symbols (see S825 to S828). Next, when the big hit is designated, as shown in FIG. 56 (3), the big hit symbol (the probability variation symbol in FIG. 56) is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (see S1872). Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (4), a fanfare effect is executed based on the reception of the fanfare command (see S905), and a big hit display is performed. Then, when the grand prize opening is opened and the first round is started (see S901), the mid-round effect including the notice effect is selected (see S911), and the notice effect is included as shown in FIG. 56 (5). An effect during the round is executed (see S1904). For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (5), the production control microcomputer 100 displays a character string “recommended stand” on the variable display device 9 as the announcement content in the production during the round. Note that when the notification effect is executed, the notification content may be output by voice (for example, the voice “Recommended stand” is output) instead of displaying the character string indicating the notification content. Moreover, while displaying the character string which shows notification content, you may make it output notification content by an audio | voice.

  Thereafter, in this embodiment, when the notification content is set, after the first round is finished, an in-round effect including the notification effect is selected every time the round is started (see S1978). An in-round effect including a notice effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 56 (5) (see S1904). In addition, the aspect of the effect may be different between the notification effect in the in-round effect selected in S1978 and the notification effect in the in-round effect selected in S911. When the big hit gaming state is ended and the ending effect is ended, the notification effect information is erased and the notification content setting flag is reset (see S980 and S981), and the setting content of the notification effect is cleared. Instead of executing the announcement effect every round, the announcement effect is executed only for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, only rounds 1, 5, 10, and odd-numbered rounds only). May be.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the notification content is set, it is based on the fact that the game is in the big hit game (specifically, the command is changed to the big hit game state and the big prize opening open command Is received (see S901)), it is determined that a predetermined notification effect execution condition is satisfied, and the notification effect is executed in the round effect during the big hit game. In addition, when a predetermined notification effect execution condition is established and the notification effect is executed, the setting contents of the notification effect are reset.

  When the big hit game is being played, the notification effect may be executed in the interval effect or the ending effect, for example, instead of executing the notification effect in the effect during the round. Further, in this embodiment, the case where it is determined that the predetermined notification effect execution condition is established based on the fact that the big hit game is being executed and the notification effect is executed is shown. It may be determined that the notice effect execution condition is satisfied. For example, when a big hit is won (when the decorative symbol stops being a big hit symbol), or when a small hit is made, so-called five consecutive villas (five consecutive big hits), the predetermined notification effect execution conditions are met It may be determined that the notification effect may be executed. Further, for example, the number of starts at the time of big hit or small hit may be counted, and when the count number reaches a predetermined number, it may be determined that a predetermined notification effect execution condition has been established and the notification effect may be executed. Further, for example, the execution time of the notification effect is set in advance in the notification content setting process, and the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the execution time is set based on the current time information input from the backup RAM 356. A notification effect may be executed.

  Further, the condition for executing the notice effect may be different from the condition for deleting the notice effect information. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control so as to execute the announcement production every time the big hit game is being played, and the announcement is made on the condition that it becomes a so-called three consecutive villas (three consecutive big hits). It is also possible to control so that the effect information is erased and the notification effect is not executed even if a big hit game is subsequently played.

  Next, the display mode of the variation display of the decorative symbol using the almighty symbol in the variation display device 9 will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a variation display of decorative symbols using almighty symbols executed in the variation display device 9. In FIG. 57, the display state changes in numerical order as (1) (2) (3) (4) (5).

  When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the current date and time is between the design change period as described above (for example, from 12:00 to 13:00 on the date set using the almighty design setting screen). ) (See S1810, S1816), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol including the almighty symbol is determined (see S1811, S1817, S1820). Then, as shown in FIGS. 57 (1) and (2), the variable display device 9 starts the variable display of decorative symbols (see S825 to S828).

  Next, when the reach effect is to be performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect including the almighty symbol is executed as shown in FIG. 57 (3) (see S1855). In the example shown in FIG. 57 (3), the symbol “7” is displayed in the left display area of the variable display device 9, and the almighty symbol is displayed in the right display area, whereby the reach effect is executed. The reach effect may be executed by displaying almighty symbols in both the left and right display areas.

  Next, when the big hit is designated, as shown in FIG. 57 (4), the big hit symbol (the probability variation symbol in FIG. 57) is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (see S1872). In the example shown in FIG. 57 (4), the symbols “7” are displayed in the left and middle display areas, and the almighty symbol is displayed in the right display area, so that the jackpot symbol is displayed. It has become. In addition, when the reach mode is achieved by displaying the almighty symbol in both the left and right display areas, any symbol (any symbol from “1” to “9”) is stopped and displayed in the middle display area. Even if it is a case, it will be in the state which displayed the jackpot symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (5), the fanfare effect is executed based on the reception of the fanfare command (see S905), and the big hit display is performed.

  In addition, instead of using the almighty symbol, a decorative symbol may be displayed in a variable manner using a couple symbol. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of the variation display of the decorative symbol using the couple symbol executed in the variation display device 9. In FIG. 58, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3) (4) (5).

  When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the current date and time is between the design change period as described above (for example, from 12:00 to 13:00 on the date set using the almighty design setting screen). ) (See S1810, S1816), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol including the couple symbol is determined (see S1811, S1817, S1820). Then, as shown in FIGS. 58 (1) and 58 (2), the variable display device 9 starts the variable display of decorative symbols (see S825 to S828).

  Next, when the reach effect is to be performed during the variation display of the decorative symbols, the reach effect including the couple symbols is executed as shown in FIG. 58 (3) (see S1855). In the example shown in FIG. 58 (3), the symbol “7” is displayed in the left display area of the variable display device 9, and the couple symbol (in this example, “5” and “7” is shared). The reach effect is executed by displaying the symbols that can be used. The reach effect may be executed by displaying a couple symbol in both the left and right display areas.

  Next, when the big hit is designated, as shown in FIG. 58 (4), the big hit symbol (the probability variation symbol in FIG. 58) is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (see S1872). In the example shown in FIG. 58 (4), the symbol “7” is displayed in the left and middle display areas, and the couple symbol is displayed in the right display area, so that the jackpot symbol is displayed. It has become. In addition, when it is set as a reach mode by displaying a couple symbol in both the left and right display areas, it is a case where any symbol of “5” or “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle display area. Will be in a state of displaying a jackpot symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), the fanfare effect is executed based on the reception of the fanfare command (see S905), and the big hit display is performed.

  Next, the execution timing of the notice effect by the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 59 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect by the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the notification content according to the operation when a store clerk or the like of the game hall performs the setting of the notification content. According to the contents, the notification effect information is stored in a predetermined notification effect information storage area (see S1746). In addition, after setting the notification content, when the predetermined notification content setting prohibition period is reached (for example, when the game hall opening time is 10:00), the notification content setting prohibition flag is set to set the notification content. Is set to a prohibited state (see S1754). Even when the notification effect setting operation is not performed, control is performed to set the notification content setting to the prohibited state when the predetermined notification content setting prohibition period is reached (see S1760).

  During the game, the decorative symbol stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol (see S1872), and when the big hit game is started and the effect during the round is started (specifically, when the big prize opening opening flag is set in S901, S1971). 59 (A), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that a predetermined notice effect execution condition has been established, and executes an effect during the round including the notice effect (see S1904). In this embodiment, during the big hit game, an in-round effect including a notice effect is executed for each round.

  Next, when the big hit gaming state is ended and the ending effect is ended, the effect control microcomputer 100 deletes the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area (see S980) and resets the notification content setting flag. (Refer to S981). That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 erases the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area based on the fact that the big hit game is being played and the predetermined notification effect execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the big hit gaming state and the notification effect is executed, the notification effect can be prevented from being executed again, and the situation where the same notification effect is repeatedly executed can be prevented.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the notification content setting prohibition flag when the predetermined notification content setting prohibition period ends (for example, when the game hall closes at 23:00), and sets the notification content setting. Is canceled (see S1750).

  In addition, when the predetermined announcement production execution condition is not satisfied because the game has never been a big hit during the game, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the announcement production is never executed during the game, The notification effect information is stored in the notification effect information storage area. In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the production control microcomputer 100 notifies when the predetermined notification content setting prohibition period ends (for example, when the game hall closes at 23:00). The content setting prohibition flag is reset, the prohibition state of the notification content setting is canceled (see S1750), and it is determined that a predetermined notification content erasure time (for example, 23:00, which is a game shop closing time) has elapsed. (See S1755), the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area is deleted (see S1756), and the notification content setting flag is reset (see S1757).

  By controlling as described above, the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area can be erased based on the time counted by the real-time clock 353, and the predetermined notification effect execution condition is not satisfied. Even if the notification effect is not executed, the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area can be deleted.

  In this embodiment, the case where the notification effect information is automatically deleted based on the fact that the game hall closing time (23:00) is reached when the notification effect is not executed is shown. The timing for automatically erasing is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the date and time when the notification content is set based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353 when the notification content is set, and from the setting date and time of the notification content. The notification effect information may be automatically deleted based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, one day).

  Next, the execution timing of the symbol change in the decorative symbol variation by the production control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the symbol change in the decorative symbol variation by the effect control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 60, as a precondition, it is assumed that the symbol change period is from 12:00 to 13:00 in the daytime, and the decorative symbol variation display using the almighty symbol is performed during the symbol change period. Shall. Note that the execution timing of the symbol change when the decorative symbol variation display using the couple symbol is performed is the same as that shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the current date / time is within a predetermined symbol change period based on the current date / time information from the backup RAM 356 if the jackpot is designated. (Refer to S1810 and S1816). As shown in FIG. 60, when the current date and time is before the symbol change period (N in S1810, N in S1816), a normal probability variable symbol or a non-probable variable symbol is determined as a decorative symbol stop symbol (S1813, S1819, 1820), the decorative symbols are variably displayed using normal decorative symbols (for example, symbols from “1” to “9”), and the jackpot symbols are derived and displayed (S825-S828, S1851-S1859, S1872). reference).

  As shown in FIG. 60, if the current date and time is the symbol change period (Y in S1810, Y in S1816), the production control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol including the almighty symbol (S1811, S1817). , S1820). Then, a variation display of the decorative design using the almighty symbol is performed, and a jackpot symbol including the almighty symbol is derived and displayed (see S825 to S828, S1851 to S1859, and S1872).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can set the notification contents to be notified to the player and can specify the notification effects for notifying the set notification contents. The notification effect information is stored in a predetermined notification effect information storage area. In addition, when a predetermined notification effect execution condition for executing the notification effect is satisfied (in this example, during the big hit game), the notification effect is stored based on the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area. Run. Therefore, the notification effect for notifying the set notification content can be executed at an appropriate timing. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 erases the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area based on the time counted by the real time clock 353. Therefore, the set notification effect is automatically deleted as appropriate, and the work burden on the operator can be reduced. Therefore, various game effects using the real-time clock 353 can be made and the work load on the operator can be reduced. Also, since the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area is deleted based on the time counted by the real time clock 353, the notification effect is not executed because the predetermined notification effect execution condition is not satisfied. Even if it exists, the notification effect information memorize | stored in a predetermined notification effect information storage area | region can be erase | eliminated.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the display mode displayed on the variation display device 9 when the predetermined variation display mode is changed based on the time counted by the real-time clock 353. change. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the decorative symbol in at least one display row displayed on the variable display device 9 to an almighty symbol or a couple symbol that can be used as a plurality of types of decorative symbols. Then, using the changed almighty symbol or the couple symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the variation display device 9 is executed, and the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is derived and displayed on the variation display device 9. Therefore, the decorative symbol displayed on the variable display device 9 can be changed to an almighty symbol or a couple symbol based on the time counted by the real-time clock 353. Therefore, the combination of jackpot symbols that can be displayed on the variable display device 9 according to time can be increased, various game effects using the real-time clock 353 can be made, and the player's interest in games can be improved. it can.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 erases the announcement production information stored in the predetermined announcement production information storage area when the predetermined announcement production execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the same notification effect is repeatedly executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to be able to set the notification content based on the instruction input from the operation button 120. Therefore, the operation button 120 can be used both for the purpose of receiving an operation performed by the player during the execution of the game effect and for the purpose of receiving the operation performed by the operator when setting the notification content.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100, when a predetermined operation prohibition condition is satisfied (in this example, when the game hall opening time (10:00) is reached), The setting operation of the notification content by the operation button 120 is prohibited. Therefore, the operation from the operation button 120 can be prohibited during the game, and the situation where the notification content is set by the player can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the setting operation of the notification content is prohibited during a predetermined notification content setting prohibition period (in this example, from the opening time (10:00) of the game hall to the closing time (23:00). Although the case has been described, for example, a prohibition setting button is provided on the back of the mechanism board separately from the operation button 120, and when the prohibition setting button is pressed, the setting operation of the notification content is prohibited because the operation prohibition condition is satisfied. May be.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the execution is performed when the variable display is not performed and the condition for performing the variable display is not satisfied, and the normal demonstration display using the moving image is performed. Perform the production. Further, when it is determined that the demonstration display effect is to be executed, a special demonstration display effect different from the normal demonstration display effect is executed based on the time counted by the real-time clock 353. Therefore, for example, when the production is performed at the same time by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 based on the time counted by the real-time clock 353, the start timing of the demonstration display and the operation synchronization are visually confirmed. It can be confirmed whether or not there is a difference in the time measured by the real-time clock 353 between the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. Therefore, it is possible to take processing for the time lag timed by the real-time clock 353 based on the visual confirmation result, and the production execution timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is increased without increasing the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect of presentation to the player is reduced.

  In this embodiment, the case where the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a demonstration display command and the effect control microcomputer 100 performs demonstration display based on the received demonstration display command has been described. The microcomputer 560 may determine the execution timing of the demonstration display effect on the effect control microcomputer 100 side without transmitting the demonstration display command. In this case, for example, if the variation pattern reception flag is not set in S1801 in the variation pattern command reception waiting process (ie, if the variation pattern command has not been received), the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a predetermined moving image. Control to execute demonstration display using images. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the current time is a predetermined special demonstration execution time based on the time information input from the real-time clock 353, and if it is not the special demonstration execution time. It may be controlled to execute a normal demonstration display effect, and may be controlled to execute a special demonstration display effect at a special demonstration execution time.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the real-time clock setting process (S701) for setting the real-time clock 353 based on an externally input command. The real time clock 353 measures the time based on the setting in the real time clock setting process. Therefore, for example, when the production is performed simultaneously by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 based on the time counted by the real time clock 353, accurate real-time is ensured while ensuring the versatility of each board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to execute effects all at once based on the clocking result of the clock 353.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the notification effect is executed when a predetermined notification effect execution condition (in this example, the game is a big hit game) is shown. You may make it selectable from several conditions. Further, the effect mode of the notification effect may be changed according to the elapsed time until the notification effect execution condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the clock management processing in S707A of FIG. In the clock management process, the following process is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned date / time command reception flag is set (S611). If it is determined that the date / time command reception flag is not set, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the date / time command reception flag is set, it is determined whether the received date / time command is a transmission end command based on the type of command indicated by the date / time command reception flag (S612). When it is determined that it is a transmission end command, the process proceeds to S604 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a transmission end command, the received date / time command is one of a second command, minute command, hour command, day command, day command, month command, and year command. The time value data corresponding to the date / time command is set as the time value data of the real-time clock 353 (S613), and the process proceeds to S615 to be described later.

  In S613, the time-measured data is set in the real-time clock 353 specifically as follows. As shown in FIG. 17, the date / time command is divided into a second command, a minute command, an hour command, a day of week command, a day command, a month command, a year command, and a transmission end command, and is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, the type of the date / time command is specified by the type of the date / time command reception flag, and the date / time indicated by the date / time command by the value of the received data stored in the RAM 85 as the date / time data indicated by the EXT data of the received date / time command as described above. The data I / O request signal and the data (second data, minute data, hour data, day data, day data, month data, or year data) indicated by the received date / time command are output to the clock / Writing control data to be written in the corresponding register (second register, minute register, hour register, day register, day register, month register, or year register) of the calendar function unit 364 is an effect control microcomputer. 100 to the real time clock 353.

  In this case, the data for writing includes the mode data for designating the data writing mode, and the address (second register, minute register, hour register, day register, day register, month register, or Address data specifying the year register address), write data to be written to the address (second data indicated by the second command, minute data indicated by the minute command, hour data indicated by the hour command, day data indicated by the day command, Day data indicated by the day command, month data indicated by the month command, or year data indicated by the year command). When such write data is input, in the real-time clock 353, the address of the register (second register, specified by the address data included in the write data input to the bus / interface circuit 363). The minute register, the hour register, the day register, the day register, the month register, or the year register address) are selected, and control for writing the write data to the selected address is performed. As a result, the count value of the designated register is rewritten to the new date and time, thereby setting the new date and time data.

  In the production control microcomputer 100, every time S603 is executed in response to receiving the second command, minute command, hour command, day command, day command, month command, and year command transmitted sequentially. , Second register, minute register, hour register, day register, day register, month register, and year register by sequentially setting the count value, the clock output / calendar function unit 364 has the year, month, day, day , Hours, minutes, and seconds can all be set to new date and time data.

  If it is determined in S612 that the command is a transmission end command and the process proceeds to S604, the variable display device 9 performs a date / time setting completion notification to display a message indicating that the date / time setting is completed (S614). ), Go to S615. By performing such date / time setting completion notification, it is possible to easily grasp that the setting of the time value of the real-time clock 353 using the date / time command output from the date / time data output device 300 has been completed. In S615, the set date / time command reception flag is reset and returned to prepare for reception of the next command.

  In the clock management process of FIG. 61, the second register, minute register, hour register, day register, day register, clock register in the clock output / calendar function unit 364 based on the date / time commands sequentially received by the production control microcomputer 100. An example is shown in which the count values of the month register and year register are newly set sequentially. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 performs the second register, minute register, hour register, day register, day register, and month register in the clock output / calendar function unit 364 based on all received date and time commands. And a process of newly setting each count value of the year register at once.

  The date and time commands are not limited to sending date / time commands in the order of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years, but dates and times in the order of years, months, days, days of the week, hours, minutes, and seconds. Although the example in which the command may be transmitted has been described above, when the date / time command is transmitted in the order of year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second, the date / time command is transmitted to the date / time data output device 300. Since the standard second command that is most likely to have the largest difference from the actual time (for example, Japan Standard Time) is output at the end depending on the time from the transmission to the setting of the real-time clock 353, it is set to the real-time clock 353. The difference between the actual date and time can be reduced as much as possible.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an operating state, the clock management process can be executed at any time, so that the time value of the real-time clock 353 can be set at any time based on the date / time command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the clock management process may be executed only when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The predetermined execution condition may be, for example, when a demonstration display execution condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined execution condition may be, for example, the time from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time elapses. Further, as the predetermined execution condition, for example, the execution condition of the demonstration display is not satisfied, but the fluctuation display is not executed.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in a case where control is performed so as to change the effect mode of the notification effect while allowing the notification effect execution condition to be set. 62, the processes in S700, S700A, and S701 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  In S701a, the production control microcomputer 100 sets and starts a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) in the big hit elapsed time measurement timer. The jackpot elapsed time measuring timer is a timer for measuring an elapsed time after power-on or an elapsed time after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  62, the processes in S702 to S708 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  When the random number update process of step 708 is executed, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the big hit elapsed time measurement timer (S708A), and then proceeds to S702.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing notification content setting processing (S704) in the case where control is performed so that the notification effect execution condition can be set and the effect mode of the notification effect is changed. In FIG. 63, the processing of S1740a and S1740 is the same as the processing of S1740a and S1740 shown in FIG.

  If the notification content setting prohibition flag is not set in S1740 (that is, not in the prohibition period of the notification content setting process), the production control microcomputer 100 sets the notification content indicating that the notification content has already been set. It is confirmed whether the 1 flag or the notification content setting 2 flag is set (S1741A). In the example shown in FIG. 63, either the big hit or the big hit can be selected as the notification effect execution condition in the notification content setting process. If the big hit is selected as the notification effect execution condition, the notification content setting is performed. 1 flag is set (see S1746c and S1746d described later). In addition, when the big win is selected as the notification effect execution condition, the notification content setting 2 flag is set (see S1746c and S1746e described later).

  In FIG. 63, the processes of S1742 to S1746 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  When the notice effect information is stored in the predetermined notice effect information storage area in S1746, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the variable display device 9 to display a notice condition setting screen for prompting the setting operation of the notice effect execution condition (S1746a). ). FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a notification content setting screen and a notification condition setting screen in a case where control is performed so that the notification effect execution condition can be set and the effect mode of the notification effect is changed. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the notification content setting screen shown in FIG. 64A in S 1743 and sets the notification content, and then in S 1746 displays the notification condition setting screen shown in FIG. 64B. It is displayed on the variable display device 9 and prompts the user to select either “big hit” or “when the big hit is won” as the notification effect execution condition. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 waits until a detection signal is input from the operation button 120 (that is, until a notification content setting operation is performed by a store clerk or the like in the game hall) (S1746b). In addition, the notification condition setting screen for instructing the selection of “small hit” or “5 consecutive villas” as a notification effect execution condition is displayed, for example, without being limited to “big hit” or “when winning a big hit” Alternatively, a notification condition setting screen for instructing selection of a specific time such as “10:00” or “17:00” may be displayed.

  If the detection signal from the operation button 120 is not input until the notification content setting prohibition period is reached, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the notification content setting prohibition flag and also performs the notification content setting process. Exit. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may delete the notice production information set in S1746, or may select the big hit as the notice production execution condition by default and set the notice content setting 1 flag.

  When the detection signal from the operation button 120 is input (Y in S1746b), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines which notification effect execution condition is selected according to the input detection signal (S1746c). The effect control microcomputer 100 sets the notification content setting 1 flag when the big hit is selected as the notice effect execution condition (S1746d), and when the big win is selected as the notice effect execution condition. Is set to the notification content setting 2 flag (S1746e).

The processes of S1749 to S1756 are the same as those shown in FIG.
If the current time is the predetermined notification content deletion time in S1755, the effect control microcomputer 100 deletes the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area (S1756) and the notification content setting 1 flag or The notification content setting 2 flag is reset (S1757A), and the process returns.

  In FIG. 63, the processes of S1758 to S1760 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation stop process (S803) in the case where control is performed so that the notification effect execution condition can be set and the effect mode of the notification effect is changed. In FIG. 65, the processes of S1871 to S1882 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  If the small hit effect flag is not set in S1880, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the notification content setting 2 flag is set (S1882a). That is, in the notification content setting process, it is confirmed whether or not the notification content is set and whether or not the big win is selected as the notification effect execution condition.

  If the notification content setting 2 flag is set (that is, if the notification content is set and the time of winning the big hit is selected as the notification production execution condition), the production control microcomputer 100 will determine the elapsed time after the big hit. It is confirmed whether or not the measurement timer has already timed out (S1882b). In the example shown in FIG. 65, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on as described above (see FIG. 62), or as described later (see FIG. 67), after the big hit ending effect is finished, the post-hit after the big hit A predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) is set in the time measurement timer, and the elapsed time measurement timer after the big hit is started. Accordingly, in S1882b, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the power-on or the last big hit was completed.

  If the elapsed time measurement timer after the big hit has timed out, if a long time has passed since the power was turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the last big hit was finished, a long time elapses (for example, 1 hour) It is. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect including the notification effect at the time of poor performance (S1882c). If the elapsed time measurement timer after the big hit times out, it is a case where the big hit is made within a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the last big hit is finished. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare production including the notification production at the time of good performance (S1882d) and clears the big hit elapsed time measurement timer (S1882e).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 deletes the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area (S1882f), and resets the notification content setting 2 flag (S1882g). Then, the process proceeds to S1884.

  In FIG. 65, the processes of S1883 to S1885 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing round post-processing (S806) in the case where control is performed so that the notification effect execution condition can be set and the effect mode of the notification effect is changed. In FIG. 66, the processes in S1971 to S1976 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  When the big prize opening open flag is set in S1971, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the notification content setting 1 flag is set (S1977A). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the notification content is set in the notification effect setting process and whether or not the big hit is selected as the notification effect execution condition. If the notification content setting 1 flag is set (that is, if the notification content is set and the big hit is selected as the notification production execution condition), the production control microcomputer 100 will receive the big prize opening. Based on the contents of the in-open display command, an in-round effect (effect for performing round display according to the number of rounds) including the notification effect indicated in the notification effect information stored in the predetermined notification effect information storage area is selected ( S1978).

  If the notification content setting 1 flag is not set (that is, if the notification content is not set), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the announcement production based on the content of the display command during the big prize opening opening. A normal mid-round effect not included (effect that performs round display according to the number of rounds) is selected (S1979).

  In FIG. 66, the processes of S1985 to S1983 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (S807) in the case where control is performed so that the notification effect execution condition can be set and the effect mode of the notification effect is changed. In FIG. 67, the processes of S971 to S978 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  When predetermined flags such as the normal big hit effect flag and the probable big hit effect flag are reset in S978, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the notification content setting 1 flag is set (S979A). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 deletes the announcement production information stored in the predetermined announcement production information storage area (S980) and resets the announcement content setting 1 flag (S981a).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) in the jackpot elapsed time measurement timer and starts the jackpot elapsed time measurement timer (S981b). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S982).

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the notification effect executed in the variable display device 9 when the notification effect execution condition can be set and control is performed to change the effect mode of the notification effect. In FIG. 68, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3) (4). In the example shown in FIG. 68, as a precondition, the information “recommended stand” and the corresponding production are selected as the notification content in the notification content setting process (S704), and the game hall closing time is used as the notification content erasure time. It is assumed that 23:00 is set. In addition, it is assumed that the time of winning a big hit is selected as a notice effect execution condition.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 (1) and 68 (2), when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the variation display device 9 starts the variation display of the decorative symbols (see S825 to S828). Next, when the big hit is designated, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), the big hit symbol (the probability variation symbol in FIG. 68) is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (see S1872).

  Next, a fanfare effect is executed based on the reception of the fanfare command (see S905), and a jackpot display is performed. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 68, since the big hit winning time is selected as the notice effect execution condition (see S1882a), the effect control microcomputer 100 is as shown in FIG. 68 (4). Execute fanfare effects including announcement effects. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (4), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the letters “recommended stand” on the variable display device 9 as the notification content in the fanfare production.

  Further, when executing the fanfare effect including the notification effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the jackpot elapsed time measurement timer has timed out (see S1882b). If time-out has occurred (Y in S1882b), it is a case where the jackpot is finally reached after a time longer than a predetermined time (for example, one hour) after the power-on or the last jackpot is completed, so it is possible to deal with a bad time Process data corresponding to the fanfare effect including the notification effect is selected (see S1882c), and as shown in FIG. To do. In addition, instead of displaying the character indicating the unfavorable condition, for example, a sound such as “I finally got out” may be output.

  If it has not timed out (N in S1882b), it is a case where the big hit is again within a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after the power is turned on or the last time the big hit ends, and thus a notification effect corresponding to a good time is included. Process data corresponding to the fanfare effect is selected (see S1882d), and as shown in FIG. 68 (4), a character indicating a good time such as “It's great!” Is displayed on the variable display device 9. In addition, instead of displaying the character indicating the unfavorable condition, for example, a sound such as “You are in great condition” may be output.

  As described above, if configured as shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets predetermined notification effect execution conditions (in this example, during a big hit game and when a big hit is won). Therefore, a predetermined notification effect execution condition can be changed, and a notification effect can be executed in various variations.

  In addition, if configured as shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the time measured by the real-time clock 353 until the predetermined gaming state is established (in this example, In accordance with the time of the big hit), the effect mode of the notification effect to be executed (in this example, the effect at the time of good performance or the effect at the time of poor performance) is changed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a notification effect according to the situation where a predetermined gaming state is established.

  62 to 68, whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 2 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, or a predetermined period (for example, 2 hours) since the last big hit game was ended. Although the case where the production mode of the notification effect is changed based on whether or not it has elapsed has been shown, the timing of changing the production mode of the notification production is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the time for changing the effect mode of the notification effect may be set in advance, and when it is determined that the set time is based on the time information from the real time clock 353, the effect mode of the notification effect may be changed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, the case where the selection of the big hit game or the big hit win is made possible as the notice effect execution condition. However, the notice effect execution condition to be controlled to be selectable is as follows. 62 to 68 are not limited thereto. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may perform control so that a small hit time, a so-called five consecutive resorts, or a specific time can be selected as the announcement production execution condition in the announcement content setting process.

  Also, in this embodiment, the symbol change notice effect for notifying that the symbol in the decorative symbol change will be changed before the predetermined symbol change period and before the variable period display using the almighty symbol or the couple symbol is executed. May be performed.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) when a symbol change notice effect is performed. In FIG. 69, the processing of S1801 is the same as the processing of S1801 shown in FIG. If the variation pattern reception flag is not set in S1801, it is confirmed whether or not the clock information disappearance flag indicating that the information of the real time clock 353 has disappeared is set (S1801a). When the clock information disappearance flag is set, the process returns to prohibit the execution of the effect based on the time value of the real time clock 353. On the other hand, when the clock information disappearance flag is not set, the current date / time information (day, day, hour, minute, time) of the time value data of the real time clock 353 from the storage area (time value data storage area) of the backup RAM 356 Second) is read and input (S1801A). Further, based on the input current date / time information, it is determined whether or not the current date / time is a predetermined symbol change notice period (S1801B). For example, when a symbol change is performed between 12:00 and 13:00 on a specific day as a symbol change period and a variable display using an almighty symbol or a couple symbol is performed, the symbol change period is started. When it is from 30 minutes before the start time of the symbol change period (that is, from 11:30 to 12:00 on a specific day), it is determined that it is a predetermined symbol change notice period.

  If it is determined that the current date and time is the symbol change notice period, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a symbol change notice screen informing the change of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 (S1801C), and the symbol change notice is made. Perform the production. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, a symbol change notice screen including a character string such as “the symbol will change soon” is displayed, and an effect is given to notify the player that the decorative symbol will be changed within a predetermined period. It is.

  In FIG. 69, the processes in S1802 to S1821 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the display control microcomputer 100 changes the display mode displayed on the variable display device 9 based on the date and time counted by the real-time clock 353. A variable display mode notice effect (in this example, a symbol change notice effect) for notifying the date and time is executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the date and time when the combination of jackpot symbols that can be displayed on the variation display device 9 is increased.

  Next, an operation procedure necessary for adjusting the date and time for adjusting the time value of the real-time clock 353 using the date and time data output device 300 will be described.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an operation procedure of the date / time data output device 300. 71, the main operation procedure of the operator is indicated by step SA (hereinafter simply referred to as SA), and the main control operation of the date / time data output device 300 is indicated by step SB (hereinafter simply referred to as SB). Referring to FIG. 71, when the power switch 308 is turned on without pressing the setting key, which is a specific one of the function keys 304b (SA1), the date and time that is the time value in the real-time clock unit 302 An initial screen showing predetermined information such as the current date and time of the data output device 300 is displayed on the information display unit 305 (SB1). Thereafter, a date / time data transmission standby screen, which will be described later, is displayed (SB9).

  If the operator does not wish to see the current date and time displayed on the initial screen and automatically adjust the date and time to Japan Standard Time or manually adjust and set the desired date and time Thereafter, it waits for a date / time data transmission standby screen (SB9) to be described later.

  Also, when the operator wants to see the current date and time displayed on the initial screen and automatically adjust the date and time to Japan standard time or manually adjust and set the desired date and time First, the power switch 308 is once turned off (SA2), and then the power switch 308 is turned on while the setting key is pressed (SA3). When such an operation is performed, a date / time setting method selection screen used for selecting a setting method for newly setting the date / time information that the date / time data output device 300 itself measures is displayed on the information display unit 305. It is displayed (SB2). On the date / time setting method selection screen, for example, when the “0” key of the numeric keys 304a is pressed, the date / time is set by the manual setting method, and when the “1” key is pressed among the numeric keys 304a, the date / time is set by the automatic setting method. A menu display indicating that the setting is to be performed is performed.

  When an operation for selecting manual setting is performed while the date and time setting method selection screen is displayed (SA4), the date and time manual setting screen that is displayed to set the date and time based on manual input is displayed as information. It is displayed on the part 305 (SB3). When the date / time manual setting screen is displayed, an input area for inputting the date / time to be set (year, month, day, day of the week, day, hour, minute, second) is displayed. The operator performs an operation of moving the cursor on the input area by operating the cursor key 304c, and inputs a date / time value to be set by operating the numeric key 304a. And the display corresponding to the operation is performed on the information display unit 305 (SB4). When the operator performs a confirming operation to operate the confirm key 304d (SA7), the date and time set in the input area at that time is newly set as the date and time counted by the real-time clock unit 302. Then, the manual setting process ends, and the date / time data transmission standby screen is displayed on the information display unit 305 (SB9).

  On the other hand, when an operation for selecting automatic setting is performed while the date / time setting method selection screen is displayed (SA5), an automatic date / time setting screen displayed for automatically setting the date / time is displayed as an information display. It is displayed on the part 305 (SB6). When the date and time automatic setting screen is displayed, the real-time clock unit 302 starts receiving Japanese longwave standard radio waves (JJY 40 KHz / 60 KHz) in order to adjust the date and time to Japan standard time. Then, in the status display unit 306, a display indicating the reception state of the Japanese longwave standard radio wave by the lighting state of the LED is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, at intervals of 10 seconds).

  When the reception of the Japanese longwave standard radio wave fails, the radio wave receiving operation is terminated, and an automatic setting failure display indicating that the automatic date and time setting has failed is performed on the information display unit 305 for a predetermined time (SB7). Thereafter, the display on the information display unit 305 returns to the display of the date / time setting method selection screen described above. On the other hand, when the reception of the Japanese longwave standard radio wave is successful, the radio wave reception operation is terminated, and an automatic setting success display indicating that the automatic date and time setting has been successful is performed on the information display unit 305 for a predetermined time (SB8). Thereafter, a date / time data transmission standby screen is displayed (SB9).

  The date / time data transmission standby screen is a screen indicating that it is in a standby state when a date / time command is transmitted. When the date / time data transmission standby screen is displayed, a predetermined LED of the status display unit 306 blinks. If a predetermined function key 304b is operated while the date / time data transmission standby screen is displayed, a menu display indicating that the date / time command transmission is executed is performed. When the date / time data transmission standby screen is displayed, if an operation for transmitting the date / time command is performed by the function key 304b (SA8), the information display unit 305 is before the execution of the date / time command transmission. A date / time data transmission pre-execution display (SB10) indicating that is performed, and a predetermined LED of the status display unit 306 is turned off. Thereafter, the time-measured data is acquired (internally acquired) from the real-time clock unit 302 (SB12). In the information display unit 305, the date / time data transmission execution display indicating that the transmission of the date / time command is being executed is performed for a predetermined time (SB13), and the transmission of the date / time command is executed (SB14). When reception of the date / time command is completed in the production control microcomputer 100, as described above, the date / time setting completion notification is performed in the variable display device 9.

  In addition, when the date / time data transmission standby screen is displayed, control for transmitting a start command indicating that transmission of the date / time command is started before executing transmission of the date / time command (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure) (SB11). When such a start command is transmitted, the production control microcomputer 100 can easily grasp that the date / time command is transmitted thereafter.

  When the transmission of the date / time command is completed, a RAM write data transmission standby screen indicating a standby state when transmitting predetermined data (hereinafter referred to as RAM write data) as data to be written to the backup RAM 356, The information is displayed on the information display unit 305 for a predetermined time (SB15). When the RAM write data transmission standby screen is displayed, a predetermined LED of the status display unit 306 blinks. A menu indicating that if a predetermined function key 304b is operated while the RAM write data transmission standby screen is displayed, a command indicating RAM write data (hereinafter referred to as a RAM write command) is transmitted. Display is performed. When the RAM write data transmission standby screen is displayed, if an operation for transmitting a RAM write command is performed by the function key 304b (SA9), the information display unit 305 displays the RAM write command. The RAM write data transmission execution display indicating that the transmission of the state is being executed is performed for a predetermined time (SB16), and the predetermined LED of the status display unit 306 is turned off. Then, after a RAM write start command which is a command indicating that transmission of the RAM write command is started (SB17), transmission of the RAM write command is executed (SB18).

  When receiving the RAM write start command, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts a program for writing predetermined data into the backup RAM 356 based on the RAM write command transmitted thereafter. Thereafter, processing for writing predetermined data into the backup RAM 356 is performed based on the received RAM write command.

  When the transmission of the RAM write command is completed, the RAM write indicating that it is in a standby state when a command for confirming whether or not the transmitted RAM write command is normally written (hereinafter referred to as a confirmation command) is transmitted. A message confirmation transmission standby screen is displayed on the information display unit 305 for a predetermined time (SB19). When the RAM write confirmation transmission standby screen is displayed, a predetermined LED of the status display unit 306 blinks. When the RAM write data transmission standby screen is displayed, a predetermined LED of the status display unit 306 blinks. When the RAM write confirmation transmission standby screen is displayed, a menu display indicating that the RAM write data is confirmed by operating a predetermined function key 304b is displayed. When the RAM write data transmission standby screen is displayed, if an operation for confirming the RAM write data is performed by the function key 304b (SA10), the information display unit 305 displays the RAM write data. A RAM write data confirmation in-progress display indicating that confirmation is being performed is performed for a predetermined time (SB20), and a predetermined LED of the status display unit 306 is turned off. Then, transmission of the same command as the previously transmitted RAM write command is executed (SB21). Thereafter, when the transmission of the command ends, the process for transmitting the command ends, and the display of the information display unit 305 returns to the display of the date / time data transmission standby screen.

  In the production control microcomputer 100, when the RAM write command is received again as the confirmation command after receiving the RAM write command, the RAM write command received earlier, the RAM write command received later, When the program for executing the checksum processing is executed and it is determined as a result of the checksum that the RAM write command has been normally written, the variable display device 9 displays “checksum OK”. Control is performed. Specifically, such control is performed by S614 in FIG.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special decorative symbol variation using the almighty symbol or the couple symbol is performed when the predetermined symbol change period is described, but the decorative symbol is changed when the predetermined symbol change period is reached. You may increase the display position of the symbol which can become a big hit symbol by increasing the symbol row of symbols. Hereinafter, a second embodiment will be described in which the decorative symbol variation is performed by increasing the symbol display position that can be a big hit symbol by increasing the symbol symbol sequence when the predetermined symbol changing period is reached.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes of S1801 to S1810 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when decorative pattern variation display is performed, the normal decorative pattern variation performed by displaying the symbols from “1” to “9” in the three display areas on the left middle right, respectively, and the display area Is expanded to display one of the symbols from “1” to “9”, and any one of special decorative symbol variations is performed. In this embodiment, each display area where decorative symbols are displayed is also referred to as a symbol row. When the decorative symbol variation is performed by extending the symbol symbol to five symbols, a big hit symbol is obtained when any three consecutive symbols of the five symbol symbols are the same symbol. Therefore, by expanding the symbol row to five rows, the display position of the symbol that can be a big hit symbol can be increased and the combination of the big hit symbol can be increased.

  The display position of the symbol that can be a big hit symbol is the display state of the symbols at any of a plurality of positions among the display positions of each symbol included in the variation display screen of the decorative symbol displayed on the variation display device 9. It is the display position of the symbol that becomes a big hit symbol when a specific display state is reached. In this embodiment, if any of the three consecutive stop symbols out of the five symbol sequences become the same symbol, a big hit symbol is obtained, so the first to third from the left of the five symbol sequences. The second to fourth and third to fifth display lines form symbol display positions that can be jackpot symbols.

  If the current date and time is a predetermined symbol change period in S1810, the production control microcomputer 100 includes a normal jackpot in the case of including five symbol rows as a symbol determination table used to determine the jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbol determination table is selected (S1811A), and a symbol string extension flag indicating that the decorative symbol variation including five symbol columns is selected is set (S1812A).

  In this embodiment, a jackpot symbol determination table for special decoration symbol variation is prepared in addition to the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table for normal ornament symbol variation and the normal jackpot symbol determination table. Has been. When performing special decoration symbol variation, a jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpots used when determining a probability variation symbol when using five symbol sequences (a symbol row expansion symbol determination table for symbol sequence expansion probability variation), and A jackpot display symbol determination table for normal jackpots (design symbol extended normal jackpot symbol determination table) used when determining non-probable variation symbols when five symbol columns are used is prepared in advance. The symbol string extended probability change jackpot symbol determination table is assigned a plurality of judgment values in association with each probability variation symbol, and the symbol string extended normal jackpot symbol determination table is correlated with each non-probability variation symbol. Judgment value of is assigned.

  In this embodiment, the processes of S1813 to S1816 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the current date and time is the symbol change period in S1816, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the symbol determination table used for determining the jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol as a symbol change table for when the probability change is large. The determination table is selected (S1817A), and the symbol string expansion flag is set (S1818A).

  In this embodiment, the processes of S1819 to S1828 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (S801) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, in this embodiment, the processes of S820a to S820f are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In decorative symbol variable start process, when the mission start flag is determined not to be set by S820c, effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether the FIG Pattern column extension flag is set (S820A). If it is set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data for decorative design variation in the case where five design sequences are included according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (S821A).

  In this embodiment, as process data according to the variation pattern of the decorative symbols, the process data for the symbol sequence expansion variation used when performing special decorative symbol variation using the five symbol sequences, and the game state are surely changed. Used for process data for probability change used when transitioning to a state, and process data for normal use when the game state is a state other than the probability change state (normal state, sudden probability change big hit state, small hit state) It is done. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects special process variation using five symbol sequences by selecting process sequence expansion variation process data, probability variation process data, or normal process data. When performing, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, or when the gaming state is a state other than the probability variation state, a different background color (for example, when performing a special decorative symbol variation using five symbol sequences " “Yellow”, “Red” in the probability variation state, “Blue” in the normal state) is displayed, and the decorative symbol variation display is executed. In addition, by selecting the process data for the symbol sequence expansion variation, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed by expanding the symbol sequence of the decorative symbol to five columns on the display screen of the variation display device 9.

  In this embodiment, the processes in S822 to S828 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, a display mode of decorative display variation display using five symbol arrays in the variation display device 9 will be described. FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of a decorative symbol variation display using five symbol sequences executed in the variation display device 9 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 74, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3) (4).

  When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the current date and time is between the design change period as described above (for example, from 12:00 to 13:00 on the date set using the almighty design setting screen). ) (See S1810, S1816), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol using the five symbol rows is determined (see S1811A, S1817A, S1820). Then, as shown in FIGS. 74 (1) and 74 (2), the variable display device 9 starts the variable display of decorative symbols (see S825 to S828).

  Next, when the big hit is designated, as shown in FIG. 74 (3), the big hit symbol (the probability variation symbol in FIG. 74) is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (see S1872). In the example shown in FIG. 74 (3), the symbol “7” is displayed in the third to fifth consecutive display areas from the left on the display screen of the variable display device 9 so that the big hit is achieved. The symbol is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 74, when the same symbols are arranged in the first to third consecutive display areas from the left on the display screen of the variable display device 9 and the second to fourth are displayed. Even when stop display is performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned in the three consecutive display areas, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Therefore, by expanding the symbol row (display area) to five rows, the display positions of symbols that can be jackpot symbols increase, and the combinations of jackpot symbols increase.

  For example, when the current date and time is not the symbol change period, as shown in FIG. 74 (5), normal decorative symbol variation using three symbol sequences is performed, and a stop symbol is derived and displayed. In normal decoration symbol variation using three symbol rows, only one display line 50a on which a jackpot symbol can be formed is formed as shown in FIG. 74 (5). On the other hand, when the symbol row is expanded to five rows, as shown in FIGS. 74 (2) and 74 (3), the first to third lines 40a from the left of the five symbol rows, the second to When the stop symbol of any of the fourth line 40b and the third to fifth lines 40c becomes the same symbol, it becomes a big hit symbol, so three display lines are formed. Therefore, by expanding the symbol row, it is possible to increase the display line and increase the symbol display position that can be a jackpot symbol, and increase the combination of jackpot symbols.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (4), the fanfare effect is executed based on the reception of the fanfare command (see S905), and the big hit display is performed.

  Note that the number of symbols displayed in one symbol row may be increased instead of expanding the symbol row. For example, three symbols are displayed on the upper, middle and lower sides of the symbol row per column so that a decorative pattern of a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns is displayed on the display screen of the variation display device 9 when the ornamental symbol variation is performed. It may be. Then, when the same symbols are all stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower rows or any of the left, middle, and right columns, the jackpot symbol may be used. Further, even when the same symbols are aligned and stopped on the display screen of the variable display device 9, the jackpot symbol may be used. Furthermore, the number of symbols displayed in the symbol row per row may be increased while expanding the symbol row. Even in such a configuration, the number of combinations of jackpot symbols can be increased.

  When the current date and time is the symbol change period, the number of symbol combinations may be reduced by reducing the number of symbols or reducing the number of symbols displayed in the symbol row per row. If comprised in that way, a player can be made to gaze at one symbol during the change of a decoration symbol. In addition, in the normal decorative symbol variation, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of left and right, and when the current date and time is in the symbol change period, the variation mode is changed so that it is stopped and displayed in the order of right and left, You may change a fluctuation | variation aspect so that it may stop-display in order of middle left and right.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the variation display of decorative symbols executed in the variation display device 9 when the number of symbols displayed in the symbol row per row is increased to three symbols. In this case, when performing the decorative symbol variation, the decorative symbol of 3 rows and 3 columns is displayed on the display screen of the variation display device 9. In FIG. 75, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3) (4).

  When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the current date and time is between the design change period as described above (for example, from 12:00 to 13:00 on the date set using the almighty design setting screen). ) (See S1810 and S1816), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol obtained by increasing the number of symbols in one column to 3 symbols is determined (see S1811A, S1817A and S1820). Then, as shown in FIGS. 75 (1) and 75 (2), the variable display device 9 starts the variable display of decorative symbols (see S825 to S828).

  Next, when the big hit is designated, as shown in FIG. 75 (3), the big hit symbol (the probability variation symbol in FIG. 75) is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (see S1872). In the example shown in FIG. 75 (3), the three-row and three-column decorative symbol displayed on the variable display device 9 is displayed in a state where the symbols “7” are obliquely aligned in three consecutive display areas from the lower left to the upper right. As a result, the jackpot symbol is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 75, the jackpot symbol is also derived and displayed when the same symbol is aligned in the horizontal direction in any of the upper, middle and lower rows of the three rows and three columns decorative symbol displayed on the variable display device 9. It becomes the state. In addition, when the same symbol is aligned diagonally in three consecutive display areas from the upper left to the lower right of the decorative design of 3 rows and 3 columns displayed on the variable display device 9, the state where the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed Become. Furthermore, even when the same symbols are arranged in the vertical direction in any of the left, middle, and right columns of the three rows and three columns of decorative symbols displayed on the variable display device 9, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the number of symbols per row, the display positions of symbols that can become jackpot symbols further increase, and the combinations of jackpot symbols increase.

  For example, if the current date and time is not a predetermined symbol change period, as shown in FIG. 75 (5), normal decorative symbol variation using three symbol sequences is performed, and a stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In normal decoration symbol variation using three symbol rows, only one display line 50a on which a jackpot symbol can be formed is formed as shown in FIG. 75 (5). On the other hand, when the number of symbols in one column is increased to 3 symbols and a decorative symbol in 3 rows and 3 columns is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 75 (2) and 75 (3), the variable display device When the same design is aligned in the horizontal direction in the line 45a, 45b, 45c in any of the upper, middle, and lower rows of the decorative pattern of 3 rows and 3 columns displayed in 9, 3 rows and 3 columns displayed in the variable display device 9 When the same symbols are arranged diagonally on the display lines 45d of three consecutive symbols from the lower left to the upper right of the decorative pattern, the three rows and three columns of the decorative symbols displayed on the variable display device 9 are displayed from the upper left to the lower right. Lines 45f, 45g, and 45h on the left, middle, and right of the three rows and three columns of decorative symbols displayed on the variable display device 9 when the same symbols are obliquely aligned on the three consecutive symbol display lines 45e. If the same design is aligned in the vertical direction, it will be a big hit design, So that the shown lines are eight form. Therefore, by increasing the number of symbols per row, the display line can be increased to increase the display position of symbols that can become a big hit symbol, and the combination of big hit symbols can be increased.

  In addition, the display position of the symbol which can become a big hit symbol is not limited to those arranged on a straight line such as the display lines 45a to 45h shown in FIG. 75. For example, the symbols at the display positions arranged in a chevron or C shape are the same. You may make it become a big hit symbol when it arranges with a symbol. Also, by using either the method of expanding the symbol row or increasing the number of symbols per row, the symbol row can be expanded rather than increasing the display position of symbols that can be big hit symbols and increasing the combination of big hit symbols. In addition, the number of symbols per row may be increased. For example, the number of symbols per column can be expanded to 5 symbols and the number of symbols per column can be increased to 3 symbols (ie, 3 rows and 5 columns of decorative symbols can be displayed) to increase the display position of symbols that can be big hit symbols. The combination of jackpot symbols may be increased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (4), the fanfare effect is executed based on the reception of the fanfare command (see S905), and the big hit display is performed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 arrives at the time of the change display mode change in which the current date and time is set as the symbol change period based on the time counted by the real-time clock 353, The display mode displayed on the variable display device 9 is changed. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 increases the number of display lines being displayed displayed on the variable display device 9 (in this example, the symbol row is increased from 3 rows to 5 rows). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 shifts the gaming state to the big hit gaming state when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on any of the increased display lines. Therefore, the display pattern of the jackpot symbol that can be displayed on the variable display device 9 can be increased, various game effects using the real-time clock 353 can be made, and the player's interest in games can be improved. For example, according to the present embodiment, the display lines of the symbols formed in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction in the variable display device 9 can be formed as separate display patterns, and the display pattern of the symbols is increased Can be made.

[Third Embodiment]
In addition to the configuration of each embodiment described above, the operation start date and time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is first introduced to the amusement hall can be automatically recorded and fluctuates when a predetermined period elapses from the operation start date and time. You may enable it to change the display mode in the display apparatus 9. FIG. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a third embodiment in which the operation start date and time is automatically recorded and the display mode of the variable display device 9 is changed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the operation start date and time.

  In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment is omitted, and mainly the parts different from the first embodiment or the second embodiment. explain.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes of S700 and S701 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  In S701A, the production control microcomputer 100 sets and starts a predetermined period (for example, 2 hours) in the time measurement timer after power-on. The time measurement timer after turning on the power is a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that when the operation start date and time has already been set (for example, when a hole introduction set flag to be described later is set), the processing of S701A may be skipped.

  In this embodiment, the processes from S702 to S705 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  When the command analysis process (S705) is executed, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the operation start date / time has come, and if it determines that it is the operation start date / time, the date information (year, month) from the real-time clock 353 is determined. , Day, day of the week) and operation start date and time are set based on time information (hour, minute, second) (operation start date setting process: S705A).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the predetermined display mode change period has been reached (whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed from the operation start date and time), and determines that it is the predetermined display mode change period. Then, a process of changing the display mode in the variable display device 9 is performed (display mode change process: S705B).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute a notice effect for notifying the change of the display form prior to the change of the display form in the variable display device 9 (notice execution determination process: S705C).

  In this embodiment, the processes of S707 to S708 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing operation start date setting processing (S705A) in the third embodiment. In the operation start date setting process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the operation start date set flag is set (S2750). The operation start date set flag is a flag indicating that the operation start date has already been set. The operation start date set flag is set when the operation start date is set, as will be described later (see S2756).

  If the operation start date set flag is set (that is, if the operation start date has already been set), the production control microcomputer 100 ends the process as it is. If the operation start date set flag is not set (that is, if the operation start date is not set), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the time measurement timer after power-on (S2751).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether any command reception flag (a variation pattern reception flag, a display result reception flag, a fanfare flag, an ending flag, or other command reception flags) is set ( S2752). That is, it is confirmed whether or not any presentation control command except for the demonstration display command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the command reception flag is set (that is, if any production control command is received), the flow shifts to S2754.

  If the command reception flag is not set (that is, if no production control command is received), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the time measurement timer has timed out after power-on (S2753). ). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 2 hours) has elapsed since the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on. If it has timed out (that is, if a predetermined period has elapsed), the flow shifts to S2754. If it has not timed out (that is, if the predetermined period has not yet elapsed), the processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 reads the current date information (year, month, day, day of the week) and time information (hour, minute, second) of the real-time clock 353 from the storage area (time measurement data storage area) of the backup RAM 356. Current time value information including is read and input (S2754). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the operation start date and time as the current date and time indicated in the date information and time information included in the input current time value information, and determines the determined operation start date and time (year, month, day, Information of day, hour, minute, second) is stored in the operation start date storage area of the backup RAM 356 (S2755). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the operation start date set flag (S2756). As a result, the operation start date / time information is automatically stored in the operation start date / time storage area of the backup RAM 356.

  In S 2756, the operation start date set flag is set in the backup RAM 356 provided on the lamp driver board 35. By doing so, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the set operation start date and operation start date set flag are retained. The backup RAM 356 is provided on the production control board 80 and the audio output board 70, and the operation start date and time and the operation start date and time set flag are set in the backup RAM provided on the production control board 80 and the audio output board 70. May be.

  The operation start date and time automatically stored in the backup RAM 356 as described above can be manually corrected in the information setting process of FIG. 30 by performing the above-described operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. .

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may execute a predetermined information output process to output the operation start date and time stored in the backup RAM 356 to the outside (for example, another pachinko gaming machine 1). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to input the operation start date and time of another pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside and store the input operation start date and time of the other pachinko gaming machine 1 in the backup RAM 356.

  By executing the above processing, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the game arcade and the power is turned on for the first time, the game is performed, and the game control microcomputer 560 first produces an effect control command (a demo display command). Is received, the operation start date / time is determined to be determined. Further, even if an effect control command is not received from the game control microcomputer 560, if a predetermined period (for example, 2 hours) has elapsed since the power was first turned on, it is determined that the operation start date has been reached, and the operation start date and time has been reached. Is set.

  Once the operation start date and time is set, the operation start date and time set flag is set. Thereafter, the operation start date and time setting process in S2750 to S2756 (the command from the game control microcomputer 560 is specified and the operation is started. (A program for specifying the date and time) is not performed.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing display mode change processing (S705B) in the third embodiment. In the display mode changing process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the operation start date set flag is set (S2760). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the operation start date set flag is set, it is checked whether or not the clock information disappearance flag indicating that the information of the real-time clock 353 has disappeared is set (S2761a). When the clock information disappearance flag is set, the process returns to prohibit the execution of the effect based on the time value of the real time clock 353. On the other hand, when the clock information extinction flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the current date information (year, month, day, and time) of the real-time clock 353 from the storage area (time count data storage area) of the backup RAM 356. Current time value information including day of the week) and time information (hour, minute, second) is read and input (S2761). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 operates based on the current date and time indicated in the input date information and time information and the operation start date and time stored in a predetermined operation start date and time storage area in the operation start date setting process. It is confirmed whether or not the period from the start date and time is a predetermined display mode change period (for example, between the third and fourth weeks from the operation start date and time) (S2762).

  If the period from the operation start date / time is a predetermined display mode change period (Y in S2763), the production control microcomputer 100 determines to change the display mode in the variable display device 9, and changes the display mode. A display mode change flag indicating this is set (S2764). If the period from the operation start date / time is not the predetermined display mode change period (N in S2763), the production control microcomputer 100 resets the display mode change flag if set (S2765), and ends the process. To do.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a notice execution determination process (S705C) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the notice effect is an effect for notifying that the display mode is changed in advance before a predetermined period in which the display mode in the variable display device 9 is changed. In this embodiment, the case where the notice effect is executed over two stages (for example, four days and six hours before the display mode is changed) according to the period until the display mode in the variable display device 9 is changed. explain.

  In the notice execution determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the operation start date set flag is set (S2770). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the operation start date determined flag is set, it is checked whether or not the clock information disappearance flag indicating that the information of the real time clock 353 has disappeared is set (S2771a). When the clock information disappearance flag is set, the process returns to prohibit the execution of the effect based on the time value of the real time clock 353. On the other hand, when the clock information extinction flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the current date information (year, month, day, and time) of the real-time clock 353 from the storage area (time count data storage area) of the backup RAM 356. Current time value information including day of the week) and time information (hour, minute, second) is read and input (S2771).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 operates based on the current date and time indicated in the input date information and time information and the operation start date and time stored in a predetermined operation start date and time storage area in the operation start date setting process. It is confirmed whether or not the period from the start date and time is a predetermined notice effect execution period (in this example, notice effect 1 execution period and notice effect 2 execution period) (S2772).

  If the period from the operation start date / time is a predetermined notice effect 1 execution period (for example, four days before the display mode is changed) (Y in S2773), the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the notice effect in the predetermined effect mode. It decides to execute, and sets a notice effect 1 execution flag indicating that the notice effect is executed in a predetermined effect form (S2774).

  If the period from the operation start date and time is a predetermined notice effect 2 execution period (for example, 6 hours before the display mode is changed) (Y in S2775), the effect control microcomputer 100 is the notice effect 1 execution period. It decides to execute the notice effect in a different effect form, and sets a notice effect 2 execution flag indicating that the notice effect is executed in an effect form different from the notice effect 1 execution period (S2776).

  If the period from the operation start date / time is not the predetermined notice effect 2 execution period (N in S2775), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the notice effect 1 execution flag or the notice effect 2 execution flag if set. (S2777), and the process ends.

  FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 are flowcharts showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the process of S1801 is the same as the process of S1801 shown in the first embodiment.

  If the variation pattern reception flag is not set (N in S1801), the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the notice effect 1 execution flag is set (S1801a). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the display mode change notice 1 screen for notifying the change of the display mode on the variable display device 9 (S1801b). For example, a display mode change notice 1 screen including characters such as “4 days until project” is displayed on the variable display device 9.

  If the notice effect 1 execution flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the notice effect 2 execution flag is set (S1801c). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the variable display device 9 to display the display mode change notice 2 screen for notifying the change of the display mode in a manner different from the display mode change notice 1 screen (S1801d). For example, a display mode change notice 1 screen including characters such as “6 hours to project” is displayed on the variable display device 9.

  When notifying the display mode change, instead of displaying the specific number of days or time such as “4 days” or “6 hours”, the date and time is implicitly suggested to the player, such as “the day related to water”. The content to be displayed may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case where the notice effect is executed when the decorative display pattern change is not executed and the game is not in the big hit game in the change display device 9 will be described, but in this case, it is determined that the notice effect is executed. Even if there is a possibility, a demonstration display command may be received from the game control microcomputer 560. Therefore, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a process of setting a demonstration display reception flag (see S1626) when the announcement effect 1 execution flag or the announcement effect 2 execution flag is set in the command analysis process. Control is performed so that the notice effect is preferentially executed. Also, instead of executing the notice effect when the decorative symbol variation is not executed and the big hit game is not in progress, for example, during the decorative symbol change or during the big hit game round, the screen for changing the display mode is displayed in a variable manner. You may superimpose on the apparatus 9.

  In this embodiment, the processes of S1802 to S1812 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the current date / time is not the symbol change period set as described above in S1810, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display mode change flag is set (S1812a). If the display mode change flag is set (that is, if it is determined that the display mode in the variable display device 9 is to be changed), the effect control microcomputer 100 is a normal big hit when the display mode is changed. A symbol determination table (also referred to as a normal big hit symbol determination table for special effects) is selected (S1812b). Note that steps S1801 to S1801d may be executed without the determination of S1801. In this case, the notice effects 1 and 2 may be displayed so as to overlap with normal fluctuation display. Thereby, even during normal fluctuation display, for example, a display mode change notice screen including characters such as “4 days until project” can be displayed.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table, the normal bonus jackpot determination table, the normal bonus jackpot determination table with almighty and the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table with almighty shown in the first embodiment. In addition, a special-time big hit symbol determination table for special effects and a probability change big-hit symbol determination table for special effects that are used when the display mode is changed are prepared in advance. Multiple decision values are assigned to the probability change jackpot symbol determination table for special effects in association with each probability variation symbol, and the normal jackpot symbol determination table for special effects is associated with each non-probable variation symbol. Multiple judgment values are assigned. In this embodiment, the display mode is determined by determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol using the normal jackpot symbol determining table for special effects or the probability changing jackpot symbol determining table for special effects (see S1820). A stop symbol using a decorative symbol having a different aspect before and after the change is determined. For example, before changing the display mode, the stop symbol is determined using the symbols representing the normal numbers “1” to “9”, and after changing the display mode, a figure and a number imitating a fish or the like are displayed. A stop symbol is determined using a symbol representing a combination of the two.

  In this embodiment, the processes of S1813 to S1818 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the current date / time is not the symbol change period set as described above in S1816, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display mode change flag is set (S1818a). If the display mode change flag is set (that is, if it is determined that the display mode in the variable display device 9 is to be changed), the effect control microcomputer 100 is a jackpot upon probability change when the display mode is changed. The symbol determination table (special effect big hit symbol determination table for special effects) is selected (S1818b).

  In this embodiment, the processes of S1819 to S1828 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (S801) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes of S820a to S820f, S820, and S821 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the almighty selection flag is not set in S820, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display mode change flag is set (S821a). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the decorative pattern variation process data (also referred to as special production process data) whose display mode has been changed in accordance with the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used. (S821b).

  In this embodiment, in addition to the almighty variation process data, the probability variation process data, and the normal process data shown in the first embodiment, the process data corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design is used for special effects. Process data is used. When it is determined that the display mode is to be changed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a different display mode before and after the display mode is changed by using process data for special effects. For example, before changing the display mode, a background imitating a mountain landscape is displayed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner using symbols representing normal numbers “1” to “9”. Further, for example, after changing the display mode, a background imitating the sea is displayed, and a fluctuating display of decorative symbols using symbols representing combinations of figures and numbers imitating fish is performed.

  In this embodiment, the processes in S822 to S828 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, a display mode when changing the display mode in the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example when the display mode of the variable display device 9 is changed in the third embodiment.

  If it is not determined to change the display mode in the variable display device 9 and it is not determined to perform the notice effect, the dynamic display device 9 performs the effect in the normal display mode. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (1), for example, a background imitating a mountain is displayed on the variable display device 9, and symbols representing normal numbers “1” to “9” are displayed as decorative symbols. .

  Prior to the display mode change period, when the notice effect 1 execution period is reached (for example, 4 days before the display mode change) (see S2773), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the notice effect 1 execution flag (see S2774). As shown in FIG. 83 (2), the display mode change notice 1 screen is displayed on the variable display device 9 to perform a predetermined notice effect (see S1801b). For example, as shown in FIG. 83 (2), a notice effect is performed by displaying characters such as “four days until the project” for notifying the change of the display mode.

  Next, when it becomes a notice effect 2 execution period (for example, 6 hours before the display mode change) (see S2775), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the notice effect 2 execution flag (see S2776), and FIG. ), The display mode change notice 2 screen is displayed on the variable display device 9, and a predetermined notice effect is performed in a manner different from the case where the display mode change notice 1 screen is used (see S1801d). For example, as shown in FIG. 83 (3), a notice effect is performed by displaying characters such as “6 hours until the project” for notifying the change of the display mode.

  When notifying the display mode change, instead of displaying the specific number of days or time such as “4 days” or “6 hours”, the date and time is implicitly suggested to the player, such as “the day related to water”. The content to be displayed may be displayed. In this embodiment, the case where the notice effect is executed in two stages (four days ago and six hours ago) will be described, but the present invention is not limited to two stages and may be executed over a plurality of stages.

  Next, when the display mode change period is reached (for example, the third week from the operation start date and time) (see S2763), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display mode change flag (see S2764), and FIG. As shown, the display mode in the variable display device 9 is changed (see S1812b, S1818b, S821b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (4), for example, the background display of the display screen of the variable display device 9 is switched to a background imitating the sea, and the decorative design is a combination of figures such as fish and numbers. Switch to symbol.

  The display mode shown in this embodiment is merely an example. For example, the display mode may be switched to a background imitating a mountain or sea (for example, the sky) before and after the change of the display mode. It is also possible to change the display to a decorative pattern that combines figures other than graphics such as or fish (for example, letters and symbols such as alphabets, and graphics such as birds).

  In addition, when the display mode change period is reached, not only the display mode in the variable display device 9 is changed, but also the sound output from the speaker 27 is different before and after the display mode is changed, The display of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c may be different.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the display control microcomputer 100 displays the game effect at the time of executing the announcement effect a predetermined period before the specific date and time based on the date and time counted by the real-time clock 353. The display mode notice effect for notifying the change is executed. Therefore, when the display mode in the game effect is changed when the specific date and time is reached, the player can be notified in advance of the date and time for changing the display mode.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the operation start date and time (operation start date and time) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the command received from the game control microcomputer 560, and specifies The operation start time information that can specify the operation start date and time is stored. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a specific date and time has been reached with reference to the operation start date and time specified by the stored operation start time information. Therefore, even if the operation start time differs among a plurality of gaming machines, the period from the operation start date and time until the display mode in the game effect is changed can be made the same.

  In this embodiment, a case where the display mode is changed to a predetermined display mode when the display mode change period is reached is shown. However, the player operates the operation button 120 from a plurality of display modes. Thus, the display mode may be selected.

  84 to 88 are flowcharts showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) when the player can select a display mode from a plurality of prepared display modes. The processes in S1801 to S1812 in FIG. 84 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  If the current date / time is not the symbol change period as described above in S1810, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display mode change flag is set (S1812A). If the display mode change flag is set (that is, if it is determined to change the display mode in the variable display device 9), the production control microcomputer 100 instructs the player to select the display mode. The display mode selection 1 screen for the display mode is displayed on the variable display device 9 (S1812B), and the player is prompted to select the display mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, three display modes 1 to 3 are prepared, and the player operates the operation button 120 to select one of the three display modes. To do. For example, when the display mode selection 1 screen is displayed, a display that switches and presents images showing examples of three display modes of display mode 1 to display mode 3 within a predetermined period of about 10 seconds. When one of the display modes is displayed and the operation button 120 is operated, the display mode displayed at the time of the operation is selected and used for variable display. In addition, when the display mode selection 1 screen is displayed, an image showing examples of three display modes of display mode 1 to display mode 3 every time the operation button 120 is pressed once (operation with a short pressing period). If any of the display modes is displayed and the operation button 120 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or longer (so-called long press operation), it is displayed during the operation. The displayed display mode may be selected and used for variable display. If it is determined to change the display mode, one of the three display modes can be selected. If it is not determined to change the display mode, some of the three display modes are selected. Control to be able to select either. In the examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, when it is not determined to change the display mode, one of the display mode 1, the display mode 2, or the display mode 3 can be selected from the three display modes. Shall be controlled.

  When display mode 1 is selected and instructed (Y in S1812C), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the normal mode big hit symbol determination table (the normal mode big hit symbol for special production 1 when using display mode 1). (Also referred to as a determination table) is selected (S1812D), and a display mode 1 selection flag indicating that display mode 1 has been selected is set (S1812E).

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, in addition to the probability change jackpot symbol determination table, the normal jackpot symbol determination table, the normal bonus jackpot determination table with almighty, and the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table with almighty Depending on the mode selection result, a normal jackpot symbol determination table for special effect 1, a promiscuous jackpot symbol determination table for special effect 1, a normal jackpot symbol determination table for special effect 2, and a special effect 2 A probability change big hit symbol determination table for special effects 3, a normal time big hit symbol determination table for special effects 3, and a probability change big hit symbol determination table for special effects 3 are prepared in advance. A plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table for the special effects 1 to 3 in association with each probability variation symbol, and the normal time jackpot symbol determination table for the special effects 1 to 3 is allocated to the table. A plurality of judgment values are assigned in association with each non-probable variable symbol. In this embodiment, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined using either the normal jackpot symbol determining table for the special effects 1 to 3 or the probability changing jackpot symbol determining table for the special effects 1 to 3 ( By referring to S1820), the stop symbol using the decorative symbols of different modes is determined according to the player's selection operation. For example, according to the player's selection operation, a stop symbol is determined using symbols representing normal numbers “1” to “9”, or a combination of a figure and a number imitating a fish or a bird is represented. The stop symbol is determined using the symbol.

  When the display mode 2 is selected and instructed (Y in S1812F), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the normal-time big hit symbol determination table when the display mode 2 is used (the normal-time big hit symbol for the special effect 2). (Determination table) is selected (S1812G), and a display mode 2 selection flag indicating that display mode 2 has been selected is set (S1812H).

  When the display mode 2 is not instructed to select (N in S1812F), the display mode 3 is instructed to be selected. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the normal jackpot symbol determination table (the normal jackpot symbol determination table for the special rendering 3) when the display mode 3 is used (S1812I) and the display mode. A display mode 3 selection flag indicating that 3 is selected is set (S1812J).

  If the player does not perform any display mode selection operation, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 may select one of the three display modes by default. For example, when the display mode selection operation is not performed at all, the production control microcomputer 100 may select the display mode 1 by default.

  If the display mode change flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the variable display device 9 to display a display mode selection 2 screen for instructing the player to perform a display mode selection operation (S1813A). The user is prompted to select a display mode. As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, two display modes, display mode 1 and display mode 2, are prepared, and the player operates the operation button 120 to display two display modes. Select one of them. For example, when the display mode selection 2 screen is displayed, a display in which images showing examples of two display modes of display mode 1 and display mode 2 are switched at a predetermined cycle and presented within a predetermined period of about 10 seconds. When one of the display modes is displayed and the operation button 120 is operated, the display mode displayed at the time of the operation is selected and used for variable display. In addition, when the display mode selection 2 screen is displayed, an image showing examples of two display modes of display mode 1 and display mode 2 every time the operation button 120 is pressed once (operation with a short pressing period). If any of the display modes is displayed and the operation button 120 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or longer (so-called long press operation), it is displayed during the operation. The displayed display mode may be selected and used for variable display. If it is decided to change the display mode, one of the two display modes can be selected. If it is not decided to change the display mode, some of the two display modes are selected. Control to be able to select either. In the example shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, when it is not determined to change the display mode, control is performed so that either the display mode 1 or the display mode 2 can be selected from the two display modes. To do.

  When the display mode 1 is selected and instructed (Y in S1813B), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the normal-time big hit symbol determination table when using the display mode 1 (the normal-time big hit symbol for the special effect 2). (Also referred to as a determination table) is selected (S1813C), and a display mode 1 selection flag indicating that display mode 1 has been selected is set (S1813D).

  When the display mode 1 is not instructed to select (N in S1813B), the display mode 2 is instructed to be selected. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the normal big hit symbol determination table (the normal big hit symbol determination table for the special production 2) when the display mode 2 is used (S1813E) and the display mode. A display mode 2 selection flag indicating that 2 is selected is set (S1813F).

  If the player does not select the display mode at all, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects either the display mode 1 or the display mode 2 by default. Also good. For example, when the display mode selection operation is not performed at all, the production control microcomputer 100 may select the display mode 1 by default.

  86, the processes in S1814 to S1818 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  If the current date and time are not the symbol change period as described above in S1816, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display mode change flag is set (S1818A). If the display mode change flag is set (that is, if it is determined to change the display mode in the variable display device 9), the production control microcomputer 100 instructs the player to select the display mode. The display mode selection 1 screen for the display is displayed on the variable display device 9 (S1818B), and the player is prompted to select the display mode (see FIG. 91 (1) described later). In the example shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, three display modes 1 to 3 are prepared, and the player operates the operation button 120 to select one of the three display modes. To do.

  When the display mode 1 is selected and instructed (Y in S1818C), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the display mode 1 to determine the probability change jackpot symbol determination table (special effect 1 jackpot symbol for the special effect 1). (Also referred to as a determination table) is selected (S1818D), and a display mode 1 selection flag indicating that display mode 1 has been selected is set (S1818E).

  When display mode 2 is selected and instructed (Y in S1818F), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the display mode 2 to determine the probability change jackpot symbol determination table (special effect time jackpot symbol for special effect 2). (Determination table) is selected (S1818G), and a display mode 2 selection flag indicating that display mode 2 is selected is set (S1818H).

  When the display mode 2 is not instructed to select (N in S1818F), the display mode 3 is instructed to be selected. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the probability variation big hit symbol determination table (special variation time big hit symbol determination table for the special effect 3) when the display mode 3 is used (S1818I) and the display mode. A display mode 3 selection flag indicating that 3 is selected is set (S1818J).

  When the player does not perform any display mode selection operation, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 may select one of the three display modes by default. For example, when the display mode selection operation is not performed at all, the production control microcomputer 100 may select the display mode 1 by default.

  If the display mode change flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a display mode selection two screen for instructing the player to perform a display mode selection operation on the variable display device 9 (S1819A). The user is prompted to select a display mode (see FIG. 90 (1) described later).

  When the display mode 1 is selected and instructed (Y in S1819B), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the display mode 1 to determine the probability change jackpot symbol determination table (the probability change jackpot symbol for the special effect 2). (Also referred to as a determination table) is selected (S1819C), and a display mode 1 selection flag indicating that display mode 1 has been selected is set (S1819D).

  When the display mode 1 is not instructed to select (N in S1819B), the display mode 2 is instructed to be selected. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table (the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table for the special rendering 2) when the display mode 2 is used (S1819E) and the display mode. A display mode 2 selection flag indicating that 2 is selected is set (S1819F).

  If the player does not select the display mode at all, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects either the display mode 1 or the display mode 2 by default. Also good. For example, when the display mode selection operation is not performed at all, the production control microcomputer 100 may select the display mode 1 by default.

  86 to 88, the processes in S1820 to S1828 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (S801) when a player can select a display mode from a plurality of display modes. 89, the processes in S820a to S820f, S820, and S821 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  If the almighty selection flag is not set in S820, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display mode 1 change flag is set (S821A). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 generates process data for decoration design variation using the display mode 1 (also referred to as process data for special production 1) according to the variation pattern of the design to be used. Select (S821B).

  In the example shown in FIG. 89, as the process data corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design, in addition to the process data for variation of almighty, the process data for probability variation, and the process data for normal, the process data for special effect 1 and special Process data for production 2 and process data for special production 3 are used. Then, depending on the selection result of the display mode (specifically, depending on which of the display mode 1 change flag to the display mode 3 change flag is set), any process data for the special effects 1 to 3 By using, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in different display modes. For example, when the display mode 1 is selected, a background imitating a mountain landscape is displayed, and a decorative pattern variation display using symbols representing normal numbers “1” to “9” is performed. Further, for example, when the display mode 2 is selected, a background imitating the sea is displayed, and a decorative symbol fluctuating display using a symbol representing a combination of figures and numbers imitating fish is performed. In addition, for example, when the display mode 3 is selected, a decorative pattern change display using a pattern representing a combination of figures and figures simulating a bird walking on the ground is displayed. To do.

  If the display mode 1 change flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display mode 2 change flag is set (S821C). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data for decoration design variation using the display mode 2 (process data for the special production 2) according to the variation pattern of the design to be used. (S821D).

  If the display mode 2 change flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display mode 3 change flag is set (S821E). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data for decoration design variation using the display mode 3 (process data for the special production 3) according to the variation pattern of the design to be used. (S821F).

  89, the processes in S822 to S828 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Next, a display mode of the variable display device 9 when the player can select a display mode from among a plurality of prepared display modes will be described. 90 and 91 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the variable display device 9 when a player can select a display mode from a plurality of prepared display modes. FIG. 90 is a display example of the variable display device 9 when the current date and time is not a predetermined display mode change period. FIG. 91 is a display example of the variable display device 9 when the current date and time is a predetermined display mode change period. In the example shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, it is assumed that three display modes 1 to 3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of display modes as preconditions.

  As shown in FIG. 90, when the current date and time is not the predetermined display mode change period, for example, when the display of the decorative symbols is started, the player is instructed to select the display mode as shown in FIG. The display mode selection 2 screen is displayed (see S1813A and S1819A). If the current date and time is not the predetermined display mode change period, as shown in FIG. 90 (1), either display mode 1 (effect A) or display mode 2 (effect B) is selected from the three display modes. A selection screen for instructing selection is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (2), when the player operates the operation button 120 to select and select display mode 1 (effect A), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects display mode 1 (effect A). Then, display using display mode 1 is performed (see S1813C, S1819C, and S821B). For example, based on the selection of display mode 1 as shown in FIG. 90 (3), a background imitating a mountain is displayed, and an effect using symbols representing normal numbers “1” to “9” is performed. It is.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 90 (2), when the player operates the operation button 120 to instruct selection of display mode 2 (effect B), the effect control microcomputer 100 changes display mode 2 (effect B). Select and display using display mode 2 (see S1813E, S1819E, S821D). For example, based on the selection of display mode 2 as shown in FIG. 90 (3), a background imitating the sea is displayed, and a graphic representing a combination of figures and figures imitating fish and the like is used. Production is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 91, in the case where the current date and time is a predetermined display mode change period, for example, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, the player is instructed to select the display mode as shown in FIG. The display mode selection 1 screen to be displayed is displayed (see S1812B and S1818B). When the current date and time is a predetermined display mode change period, as shown in FIG. 91 (1), all (three) display modes 1 to 3 (effects A to C) prepared in advance are displayed. A selection screen for instructing the selection of either one is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (2), when the player operates the operation button 120 to select and select display mode 1 (effect A), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects display mode 1 (effect A). Then, display using display mode 1 is performed (see S1812D, S1818D, and S821B). For example, based on the selection of display mode 1 as shown in FIG. 91 (3), a background simulating a mountain is displayed, and an effect using symbols representing normal numbers “1” to “9” is performed. It is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (2), when the player operates the operation button 120 to instruct selection of display mode 2 (effect B), the effect control microcomputer 100 changes display mode 2 (effect B). The display is performed using the display mode 2 (see S1812G, S1817G, and S821D). For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (3), based on the selection of display mode 2, a background imitating the sea is displayed, and a symbol representing a combination of figures and figures imitating fish and the like is used. Production is performed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 91 (2), when the player operates the operation button 120 to select and select display mode 3 (effect C), the effect control microcomputer 100 changes display mode 3 (effect C). Select and display using display mode 3 (see S1812I, S1818I, S821F). For example, based on the selection of display mode 3 as shown in FIG. 91 (3), a background imitating a flat ground is displayed, and a pattern representing a combination of figures and figures imitating birds walking on the ground The production using is performed.

  The change in the display mode shown in FIGS. 84 to 91 is an example, and the display mode may be changed to a mode other than the display mode shown in FIGS. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may change the notice distribution or notice form performed using the variable display device 9. In addition, the sound output from the speaker 27 may be different before and after the display mode is changed, or the display of each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c may be different.

  Also, instead of changing the number of display modes that can be selected before and after a specific date and time, control is performed so that a game effect is performed in a predetermined normal display mode before the specific date and time is specified. The display mode may be controlled so that the display mode can be selected in accordance with the player's selection operation from the plurality of display modes only after the date and time has been reached.

  As described above, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 91, the production control microcomputer 100 has a plurality of production types for one situation, and any one of the production types is selected from the plurality of production types. Select. Further, when it is determined that the current date / time is not a specific date / time, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a part of a plurality of effect types (in this example, three display modes 1 to 3 prepared in advance). After it is determined that a specific date and time has been reached, all (in this example, all of the three display modes 1 to 3 prepared in advance) are selected. Therefore, it is possible to change the production of the gaming machine.

  In addition, according to the example shown in FIGS. 84 to 91, since it is determined that the specific date and time has been reached, the player can select the increased contents and display mode, so that the effects of the gaming machine 1 are further changed. Can be given.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which all the presentation means (variable display device 9, speaker 27, and lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c) are controlled using one presentation control means. However, each rendering means may be controlled using a plurality of control boards and a plurality of control means. Hereinafter, a sound / lamp control board 80b equipped with a sound / lamp control microcomputer for controlling the speaker 27 and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c, and a symbol control microcomputer for controlling the variable display device 9 are installed. A case where the design control board 80a is provided will be described.

  FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the sound / lamp control board 80b, and the symbol control board 80a when a plurality of control means are used. In the example shown in FIG. 92, the sound / lamp control board 80b performs sound output control of the speaker 27 and display control of each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. The symbol control board 80a performs display control of the variable display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 92, “effect control” means display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. This means performing an effect such as an effect. In the example shown in FIG. 92, the effect control means controls the display control of the variable display device 9, the design control microcomputer 100a, the sound output control of the speaker 27, and the display control of each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. Are realized by various control circuits such as a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, a real-time clock 353b mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80b, a backup power supply circuit 355b, and a speech synthesis IC 173.

  The sound / lamp control board 80b includes a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b including a sound / lamp control CPU 101b, a ROM 84b, a RAM 85b, and an I / O port 87b. The RAM 85b may be externally attached. In the sound / lamp control board 80b, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM 84b.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver 352. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and is provided on the frame side of the decorative lamp 25, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, the ball-out lamp 52, the prize ball lamp 51, and the like. Supply to each lamp.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b outputs sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesizing IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the sound / lamp controlling microcomputer 100b, the lamp driver 352, and the voice synthesis IC 173. Communication).

  The symbol control board 80a is equipped with a symbol control microcomputer 100a including a symbol control CPU 101a, ROM 84a, RAM 85a, and I / O port 87a. The RAM 85a may be externally attached. In the symbol control board 80a, the symbol control microcomputer 100a operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM 84a. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command received from the sound / lamp control board 80b.

  The symbol control microcomputer 100a reads necessary data from the character ROM 89a in accordance with the effect control command received from the sound / lamp control board 80b. The character ROM 89a stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative symbols) in advance. Is. The symbol control microcomputer 100a outputs the data read from the character ROM 89a to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 performs display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92, the VDP 109 that controls the display of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the symbol control board 80a. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the symbol control microcomputer 100a, and maps the VRAM 83a therein. The VRAM 83a is a buffer memory for expanding the image data generated by the VDP 109. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM 83a to the variable display device 9.

  The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b sends an effect control command via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to a strobe signal (effect control INT signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. Receive.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the sound / lamp control board 80b. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the sound / lamp control board 80b (passes the signal in the direction from the sound / lamp control board 80b to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as signal direction regulating means.

  A signal that allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the sound / lamp control board 80b (does not pass the signal in the direction from the sound / lamp control board 80b to the relay board 77). A unidirectional circuit is mounted as a direction regulating means. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 92 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92, the sound / lamp control board 80b includes a real-time clock 353b for outputting the current time, a backup RAM 356b, a power supply monitoring circuit 357b, a data transfer controller 358b, and a ROM 359b. The functions of the real-time clock 353b, backup RAM 356b, power supply monitoring circuit 357b, data transfer controller 358b, and ROM 359b are the same as the functions of the real-time clock 353, backup RAM 356, power supply monitoring circuit 357, data transfer controller 358, and ROM 359 described above. It is.

  The symbol control microcomputer 100a includes date information indicating the current date (year, month, day, day of the week) and time information indicating the current time (hour, minute, second) timed by the real time clock 353 from the backup RAM 356b. Is read and input, and various processes are executed based on the current date and time.

  The real-time clock 353b, the backup power supply circuit 355b, the backup RAM 356b, the power supply monitoring circuit 357b, the data transfer controller 358b, and the ROM 359b may be mounted on the symbol control board 80a instead of the sound / lamp control board 80b. Further, the backup power supply circuit 355b, the backup RAM 356b, the power supply monitoring circuit 357b, the data transfer controller 358b, and the ROM 359b may be mounted on the main board 31. Alternatively, the time may be measured by counting up a counter provided in the backup RAM 356b without providing the real-time clock 353b. For example, the counter provided in the backup RAM 356b is synchronized with the clock pulse signal supplied from the clock circuit backed up by the backup power supply circuit, so that "day", "hour", "minute", "second" ”To measure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs a game effect based on an operation signal from the operation button 120. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs various setting processes based on the operation signal from the operation button 120. In this embodiment, the symbol control microcomputer 100 performs notification based on the operation signal from the operation button 120 according to the same processing as the effect control microcomputer 100 shown in the first to third embodiments. The notification content to be notified to the player in the production is set. Note that the notification content is not set based on the operation signal from the operation button 120, but is set based on the on / off signal from the effect switch 354b provided on the sound / lamp control board 80b. Good. Further, the effect switch 354b may be provided on the symbol control board 80a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92, the symbol control microcomputer 100a follows the same processing as the effect control microcomputer 100 shown in the first to third embodiments, and the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353b. Based on the above, a notification effect is executed, a decorative symbol variation using an almighty symbol is performed, a symbol sequence for performing the decorative symbol variation is expanded, or a display mode on the variable display device 9 is changed. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 92, as an example of controlling each rendering means using a plurality of control boards and a plurality of control means, a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80b is Although the case has been described where the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 is transferred to the symbol control microcomputer 100a mounted on the symbol control board 80a, each effect is made using a plurality of control boards and a plurality of control means. The mode of controlling the means is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may first receive an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 and transfer it to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a symbol control board 80a and a sound / lamp control board 80b as an example of controlling each presentation means using a plurality of control boards and a plurality of control means. However, a plurality of other types of control boards may be provided. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a symbol / sound control board that controls the variable display device 9 and the speaker 27, and a lamp control board that controls the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. Further, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a symbol / lamp control board that controls the variable display device 9 and the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, and 28 c, and a sound control board that controls the speaker 27. .

  In addition, the production using the real-time clock 353 in each of the above-described embodiments is an example, and the production control microcomputer 100 (the design control microcomputer 100a and the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may be used). (Good) may execute effects other than the effects shown in the above embodiments. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 includes a setting table (setting tables shown in FIGS. 93, 94 to 97, and 99) in which execution timings of various effects are set in advance. Various effects may be executed based on the date information and time information. Such a setting table may be stored in the backup RAM 356 so that setting data such as execution timings of various effects can be appropriately rewritten, and read and used in the RAM 85 of the effect control microcomputer 100. Data in the setting table in such a case (data such as the execution timing of the effect) can be input in response to an operation using the operation means such as the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354b by starting a data input program. Like that. It should be noted that data input operation means such as a keyboard can be connected to the backup RAM 356 and such data can be input using the operation means. Further, the RAM 85 of the production control microcomputer 100 may be backed up by a backup power source, and the data of the setting table may be stored in the RAM in a rewritable manner. In that case, as in the case described above, a configuration in which data can be input by the operation means is used. If it is not necessary to rewrite the data in the setting table, the data in the setting table may be stored in the ROM 84 of the production control microcomputer 100 and the data in the setting table may be read out and used in the RAM 85. Further, such a setting table can be used similarly in the circuit configuration shown in FIG.

  FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting table (an effect period-specific effect selection table) in which execution timings of various effects are set in advance. In the example shown in FIG. 93, the execution timing of each effect in the case of switching and using two types of effects A and B is preset. In the example shown in FIG. 93, the production control microcomputer 100 has a current date and time of 18:00 on June 1, 2006 to June 22, 2006, based on date information and time information from a real-time clock. If it is between, the effect A is executed in the game effect (for example, while the decorative symbol is changing). In addition, when the current date and time is between 18:00 on June 22, 2006 and 18:00 on July 13, 2006, the effect B is executed in the game effect. Furthermore, when the current date and time is after 18:00 on July 13, 2006, either effect A or effect B is executed in the game effect. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may select and execute either production A or production B by lottery, or may produce either production A or production B according to the selection operation by the player. It may be selected and executed.

  FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the setting table (day-of-week effect selection table) in which execution timings of various effects are set in advance. As shown in FIG. 94, it may be set in advance in the setting table so as to execute a different effect for each day of the week (reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 94). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the day of the week based on the date information input from the real-time clock 353, selects the type of effect based on the determined day of the week and the setting table shown in FIG. May be executed.

  Also, a plurality of projects that prescribe the execution form of effects may be determined in advance, and the execution timing of each project may be set in advance in the setting table. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a project execution information table in which the execution timing of each project is set in advance. In the example shown in FIG. 95, when the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the current date and time is 18:00 on June 22, based on the date information and time information input from the real-time clock 353, the project 1 It is determined that this is the execution timing. Then, the project 1 is executed and, for example, control is performed to change the production type of the production period-specific production. If it is determined that the current date and time is 18:00 on July 13, it is determined that it is the execution timing of Project 2. Then, the project 2 is executed and, for example, control is performed to change the effect type of the effect by operation period, and control is performed so that the effect type can be selected by a selection operation by the player.

  In addition, the execution timing of the notice effect for notifying the player of the execution of each project may be set in advance in the setting table. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the project notice information table as a setting table in which the execution timing of the notice effect for each project is set. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the notice effect execution timing has come, based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353 and the project notice information table shown in FIG. Then, if it is the execution timing of the notice effect, the corresponding notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 96, for the project 1, the notice effect 1 is executed at 18:00 on June 18 and the notice effect 2 is executed at 18:00 on June 19, The notice effect 3 is executed at 18:00 on the day, the notice effect 4 is executed at 18:00 on June 21, the notice effect 5 is executed at 12:00 on June 22, and the June 22 The notice effect 6 is executed at 15:00, and the notice effect 7 is executed at 17:00 on June 22. Also, for Project 2, a notice effect 1 is executed at 18:00 on July 9, a notice effect 2 is executed at 18:00 on July 10, and a notice is given at 18:00 on July 11. Production 3 is executed, announcement production 4 is executed at 18:00 on July 12th, announcement production 5 is executed at 12:00 on July 13th, and announcement production 6 is executed at 15:00 on July 13th. And the notice effect 7 is executed at 17:00 on July 13th.

  Moreover, the execution timing of the notification effect may be set in the setting table in advance. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a notification information table as a setting table in which the execution timing of each notification effect is set. The production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the execution timing of the announcement production has come, based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353 and the announcement information table shown in FIG. And if it is an execution timing of notification effect, the corresponding notification effect will be performed.

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the variable display device 9 when a notification effect is executed according to the notification information table shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, as an example, a display form of notification effects executed on Sunday according to the notification information table shown in FIG. 97 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (1), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an initial screen (for example, a screen displaying a predetermined image such as a model name, etc., and a special demonstration display shown in FIG. 8) is displayed. After a screen on which an image different from the image is displayed), a game is possible. When the production control microcomputer 100 determines that it is 10:00 on Sunday based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock, it determines that it is the notification time of the event of the day (see FIG. 97). . Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (2), a notification screen for notifying that the event is today is displayed and a notification effect is executed. When the notification time has passed, as shown in FIG. 98 (3), the normal production mode is restored.

  Next, if the production control microcomputer 100 determines that it is 17:00 on Sunday based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock, it determines that it is the notification time that it is a store manager's push pad ( (See FIG. 97). Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (3), a notification screen for notifying that the store manager is pushing the table is displayed and a notification effect is executed.

  Moreover, you may preset the execution period of the special effect (for example, the effect called a mission effect) performed over a predetermined period (for example, 20 minutes) to a setting table. FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a special effect information table as a setting table in which a special effect execution period is set. The production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the special production start time has come, based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353 and the special production information table shown in FIG. And if it is the start time of a special production, a special production (for example, mission production) will be started. After starting the special effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 has reached the end time of the special effect based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353 and the special effect information table shown in FIG. Judge whether or not. For example, when 20 minutes have passed after the start and the end time of the special effect is reached, the special effect ends.

  FIG. 100 and FIG. 101 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the variable display device 9 when a special effect is executed according to the special effect information table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 100 (1), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an initial screen (for example, a screen displaying a predetermined image such as a model name, etc., which is a special demonstration display shown in FIG. 7). After a screen on which an image different from the image is displayed), a game is possible.

  If the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the time has reached 10:00 based on the date information and time information from the real time clock, it determines that the start time of the special production (in this example, the mission production) has come ( (See FIG. 99). As shown in FIGS. 100 (2) and (3), the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a screen indicating that a special effect is to be started on the variable display device 9, and starts the special effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 100 (2) and 100 (3), after displaying a screen including the character string “Golden Time”, a screen including the character string “Get a reach with 7 within 20 minutes!” Is displayed. To do.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, as shown in FIGS. 100 (4), (5), and 101 (6), while the special effect is being executed, the reach mode is set with the left and right symbols aligned at 7. When it becomes, the effect of displaying the big hit unconditionally is performed. Further, if the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the special production end time has come based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock, the production control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit during the execution of the special production. As shown in FIGS. 100 (4) and 100 (5), after displaying the character string “20 minutes have elapsed”, the character string “sorry” is displayed, and the special performance is ended. If a big hit is made during the execution of a special performance, the special presentation ends as shown in FIG. 101 (7) when the big hit game ends after the end time of the special production. Return to normal performance.

  Thereafter, the same processing is repeated. For example, when it is determined that the time has reached 17:00, it is determined that the start time of the special effect is reached again (see FIG. 99), and the special effect is obtained as shown in FIG. 101 (8). To start.

  In addition, the specific date and time for executing the specific performance or project may be set in advance in the setting table based on the statistics of the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, a predetermined monthly project may be set to be executed in the fourth week of introduction based on statistics of the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, for example, when the monthly project is executed, the basic screen such as the background displayed on the variable display device 9 and various effects such as the reach effect may all be replaced. You may make it replace. Further, instead of replacing all screens and effects, only a part of the screens and effects may be replaced.

  In addition, for example, the gaming state shifts to a high probability state / low base state (a high probability state in which the game ball is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability (ratio) than the normal gaming state). In the case of controlling to shift to a state that does not shift), based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353, within a predetermined period (for example, one month) from the operation start date and time, high probability / low base The high probability / low base state is not notified even if the state becomes a state, and the high probability / low base state is maintained even if the high probability / low base state is reached after a predetermined period (for example, one month). May be notified. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the current time is within a predetermined range (for example, one month from the operation start date and time) based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353. Even if the high probability / low base state is entered, a normal effect display (so-called latent state) is performed, and when the current time exceeds a predetermined range, if the high probability / low base state is reached, a dedicated effect (for example, The mission effects shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 may be executed. If comprised in that way, the appearance probability of an exclusive production can be changed with a period. Therefore, a different pachinko gaming machine 1 can provide different interests based on the time measurement result of the real-time clock 353, and a situation where the player gets bored with the game can be prevented.

  Further, in each of the embodiments described above, for example, in addition to the first decorative design used in the normal decorative design variation, a second decorative design different from the first decorative design (for example, the character color or You may provide the pattern from which an aspect differs. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 normally performs control so as to perform variable display using the first decorative design, and determines that the specific date and time has come based on the date information and time information from the real-time clock 353. Then, during the variation of the first decorative symbol, during reach, during reach, after the reach deviation variation, the variation display using the second decorative symbol is further executed to derivatively display the jackpot symbol. Good.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, a battery is used as the backup power supply circuit 355, and each of the real-time clock 353, the backup RAM 356, and the data transfer controller 358 is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 355 even when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Shows an example in which power is supplied. In this case, the battery used as the backup power supply circuit 355 may be either a primary battery that cannot be charged or a secondary battery that can be charged.

  In the fourth embodiment, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing backup power supply monitoring processing according to the fourth embodiment. The process of FIG. 102 is a process executed in S700A of FIG. 18 and is replaced with the one shown in FIG.

  The backup power supply monitoring process in FIG. 102 differs from the backup power supply monitor process shown in FIG. 20 in that the step of S605 in FIG. 20 is not provided. That is, in the case of the fourth embodiment, the real-time clock 353, from the battery, both when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Power is supplied to each of the backup RAM 356 and the data transfer controller 358. Therefore, when power cannot be supplied due to the battery running out of the backup power supply circuit, even if power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the real time clock 353 cannot be operated, and the backup RAM 356 is the data of the time measured value of the real time clock 353. Cannot be remembered. As a result, in the case of the fourth embodiment, even when it is determined in S601 that the backup power supply has been depleted in S601, the default value as the initial set value of the time among the time measured values of the real-time clock 353 is obtained. The process of setting is not performed.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of each of the above embodiments mainly gives a player a predetermined game value when the stop symbol of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning prize becomes a predetermined symbol. Although it was a pachinko machine that became possible, if there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric accessory that is released based on a start prize, a predetermined game value can be given to the player, or a start prize Even if it is a pachinko game machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric accessory that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol that is variably displayed based on the combination of the predetermined symbol Applicable. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, when the unit information setting mode in which the unit information setting mode screen is displayed, the operation day change setting mode screen in which the operation day change setting mode screen is displayed, and the hall setting mode screen is displayed. The operation button 120 is set in advance within a predetermined time after the power is turned on in a state where the predetermined operation means as described above is operated. An example in which control is performed on condition that the operating means is operated a predetermined number of times will be described.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing information setting processing according to the fifth embodiment. The information setting process in FIG. 103 is a process that replaces the information setting process shown in FIG. The information setting process in FIG. 103 is different from the information setting process in FIG. 30 in that S921A, S921B, S923A, and S923B are added, and that S927A is provided instead of S927.

  Referring to FIG. 103, when it is determined in S921 that the power is turned on with the three operation means including the clear switch 912, the effect switch 354, and the operation button 120 turned on simultaneously, FIG. As in the case of S926, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on (S921A).

  If it is determined in S921A that 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S921A that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the power is turned on, based on the signal from the operation button 120, it is determined whether or not the operation button 120 is operated in the on state after the power is turned on. Based on counting the number of times the operation button 120 is turned on after power-on using a predetermined counter (not shown), it is determined whether the operation button 120 has been turned on six times after power-on. (S921B). If it is determined that the operation button 120 has not been turned on six times, the process returns to S921A. On the other hand, when it is determined that it has been turned on six times, the operation day change setting process for performing the process in the operation day change setting mode is executed (S922), and the process returns.

  In S923, when it is determined that the power is turned on in the state where the two operation means of the clear switch 912 and the effect switch 354 are turned on at the same time (the operation button 120 is not turned on), the process of S921A Similarly to the case, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on (S923A).

  If it is determined in S923A that 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S923A that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the operation button 120 is operated in the on state after the power is turned on based on the signal from the operation button 120. Based on counting the number of times the operation button 120 is turned on after power-on using a predetermined counter (not shown), it is determined whether or not the operation button 120 is turned on four times after power-on. (S923B). If it is determined that the operation button 120 has not been turned on four times, the process returns to S923A. On the other hand, when it is determined that the vehicle is turned on four times, the base information setting process for performing the process in the above-described base information setting mode is executed (S922), and the process returns.

  In S925, when it is determined that the power is turned on with only the clear switch 912 being turned on, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the power is turned on, as in the case of S926 described above. (S926).

  If it is determined in S926 that 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S926 that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the power is turned on, based on the signal from the operation button 120, it is determined whether or not the operation button 120 is operated in the on state after the power is turned on. Based on counting the number of times the operation button 120 is turned on after power-on using a predetermined counter (not shown), it is determined whether the operation button 120 is turned on twice after power-on. (S927A). When it is determined that the operation button 120 is not turned on twice, the process returns to S926. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state has been turned on four times, a hole setting process for performing the process in the hole setting mode described above is executed (S922), and the process returns.

  By performing such information setting processing, based on the large number of operations of the operation button 120 required after power-on, the time value setting of the real-time clock 353 and the number of working days are performed in the base information setting mode. The table information setting procedure, which is a setting procedure for performing initialization, sets the time value of the real-time clock 353, and executes effects such as special demonstration display and almighty diagram display in the hall setting mode. It is determined in advance to a complicated setting procedure (the procedure is complicated due to a large number of operations) rather than a hole setting procedure which is a setting procedure for setting timing. Further, the operation days / days change setting procedure, which is a setting procedure for performing the operation days change setting in the operation days change setting mode based on the large number of operations of the operation button 120 required after power-on, is described above. These are set in advance in a complicated setting procedure (the procedure is complicated due to a large number of operations) than each of the table information setting procedure and the hall setting procedure.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment, when the unit information setting mode in which the unit information setting mode screen is displayed, the operation day change setting mode screen in which the operation day change setting mode is displayed, and the hall setting mode screen is displayed. The operation button 120 is set in advance within a predetermined time after the power is turned on in a state where the predetermined operation means as described above is operated. An example in which control is performed on condition that the operating means is operated for a predetermined time will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing information setting processing according to the sixth embodiment. The information setting process in FIG. 104 is a process that replaces the information setting process shown in FIG. The information setting process in FIG. 104 is different from the information setting process in FIG. 30 in that S921A, S921C, S923A, and S923C are added, and that S927B is provided instead of S9267.

  Referring to FIG. 104, when it is determined in S921 that the power is turned on with the three operation means including the clear switch 912, the effect switch 354, and the operation button 120 turned on simultaneously, As in the case of S926, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on (S921A).

  If it is determined in S921A that 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on, the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in S921A that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the power was turned on, it is determined whether or not the operation button 120 has been turned on based on the signal from the operation button 120, and the on-state has been turned on. Whether or not the operation button 120 has been turned on for 10 seconds or more after the power is turned on is determined based on counting the operation duration time at a predetermined time (not shown) (S921C). If it is determined that the operation button 120 has not been turned on for 10 seconds or longer, the process returns to S921A. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 120 has been turned on for 10 seconds or longer, the operation day change setting process for performing the process in the above-described operation day change setting mode is executed (S922), and the process returns.

  In S923, when it is determined that the power is turned on in the state where the two operation means of the clear switch 912 and the effect switch 354 are turned on at the same time (the operation button 120 is not turned on), the process of S921A Similarly to the case, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on (S923A).

  If it is determined in S923A that 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S923A that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the power was turned on, it is determined whether or not the operation button 120 is operated in the ON state based on the signal from the operation button 120, and in the ON state. It is determined whether or not the operation button 120 has been turned on for 5 seconds or more after the power is turned on based on counting the operation duration time at a predetermined time (not shown) (S923C). If it is determined that the operation button 120 has not been turned on for more than 5 seconds, the process returns to S923A. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 120 has been turned on for 5 seconds or longer, the base information setting process for performing the process in the above-described base information setting mode is executed (S924), and the process returns.

  In S925, when it is determined that the power is turned on with only the clear switch 912 being turned on, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the power is turned on, as in the case of S926 described above. (S926).

  If it is determined in S926 that 30 seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in S926 that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the power was turned on, it is determined whether or not the operation button 120 has been turned on based on the signal from the operation button 120 and the on-state has been turned on. It is determined whether or not the operation button 120 has been turned on for 2 seconds or more after the power is turned on based on counting the operation duration time at a predetermined time (not shown) (S927B). If it is determined that the operation button 120 has not been turned on for 2 seconds or longer, the process returns to S926. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 120 has been turned on for 2 seconds or longer, the hole setting process for performing the process in the hole setting mode is executed (S928), and the process returns.

  By performing such information setting processing, based on the length of the operation time of the operation button 120 required after the power is turned on, the time value setting of the real-time clock 353 and the number of working days are performed in the base information setting mode. The table information setting procedure, which is a setting procedure for performing initialization, sets the time value of the real-time clock 353, and executes effects such as special demonstration display and almighty diagram display in the hall setting mode. It is determined in advance to a complicated setting procedure (a procedure is complicated due to a long operation time) rather than a hole setting procedure which is a setting procedure for setting timing. The operating days / days change setting procedure, which is a setting procedure for setting the operating days to be changed in the operating days change setting mode based on the operation time length of the operation button 120 required after power-on, is described above. These are set in advance in a complicated setting procedure (the procedure is complicated due to a long operation time) rather than each of the table information setting procedure and the hall setting procedure.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 27, FIG. 28, FIG. 30, FIG. 103, FIG. 104, etc., the setting procedure determined for setting the time value of the real-time clock 353 is the execution time of the special reach display, and The setting procedure is set in advance to a setting procedure that is more complicated than the setting procedure that is set in order to set the performance execution condition such as the execution date of the variation display of the decorative design using the almighty design. Specifically, for example, the setting procedure for setting the time value of the real-time clock 353 is a setting procedure in which the number of operating means that are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on is set to set the execution condition of the effect. Since there are more cases, the setting procedure is complicated. In the setting procedure for setting the time value of the real-time clock 353, a confirmation screen is displayed at a stage before the setting is confirmed, and it is necessary to perform further operations accordingly. The setting procedure is more complicated than the setting procedure determined for setting the execution condition of the effect in which the setting procedure that is not necessary is determined. As described above, the setting procedure determined for setting the time measurement value of the real-time clock 353 is determined in advance as a setting procedure that is more complicated than the setting procedure determined for setting the performance execution condition. Based on the difference in complexity of the setting procedure, it is possible to suppress erroneous setting of the number of working days, which is information related to the time value of the real-time clock 353 due to an erroneous operation.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 27, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 103, FIG. 104, etc., the setting procedure defined for setting the number of working days specified based on the time value of the real-time clock 353 is special. It is determined in advance to a setting procedure that is more complicated than the setting procedure that is set in order to set the execution condition of the production such as the execution time of the reach display and the execution date of the fluctuating display of the decorative design using the almighty design Yes. Specifically, for example, in the setting procedure for setting the number of working days, the number of operating means that are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on is larger than in the case of the setting procedure defined for setting the execution condition of the effect. So the setting procedure is complicated. Thus, the setting procedure determined for setting the number of working days is determined in advance as a setting procedure that is more complicated than the setting procedure determined for setting the performance execution condition. Based on the difference in complexity, it is possible to suppress erroneous setting of the number of working days, which is information related to the time value of the real-time clock 353, due to an erroneous operation.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 103, FIG. 104, etc., the setting procedure defined for setting the number of working days specified based on the time value of the real time clock 353 is The setting procedure is set in advance more complicated than the setting procedure set for setting the clocked value of the clock 353. Specifically, for example, in the setting procedure for setting the number of working days, the number of operating means that are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on is larger than in the case of the setting procedure defined for setting the execution condition of the effect. So the setting procedure is complicated. Thus, the setting procedure determined for setting the number of working days is determined in advance as a setting procedure that is more complicated than the setting procedure determined for setting the performance execution condition. Based on the difference in complexity, it is possible to suppress erroneous setting of the number of working days, which is information related to the time value of the real-time clock 353, due to an erroneous operation.

  (4) As a complicated setting procedure, it is a procedure for displaying screens as shown in FIGS. 21 to 26 that can be set according to the operation of the operation means such as the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354. Includes operations at power-on. By this, unless a complicated setting procedure is passed, a screen that can be set according to the operation of the operating means is not displayed, and setting according to the operation of the operating means is not possible. It is possible to further suppress erroneous setting of information related to the time value of the real-time clock 353.

  (5) As a complicated setting procedure, a procedure in which an operation confirmation image is displayed and two time setting operations (confirmation operations) are required in S548 to S550 in FIG. Thus, since it is not possible to decide to change the setting without going through a complicated setting procedure, it is possible to further suppress erroneous setting of information related to the time value of the real-time clock 353 due to an erroneous operation. Can do.

  (6) A complicated setting procedure is set according to the operation of the operation means such as the operation button 120, the effect switch 354, and the clear switch 912 as shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, 103, 104, and the like. The procedure becomes more complicated as the number of operation means required for the operation is relatively increased. Thereby, it can further suppress that the information relevant to the time count value of the real-time clock 353 is erroneously set due to an erroneous operation.

  (7) The complicated setting procedure is such that the number of operations of the operation means such as six operations in S921B, four operations in S923B, and two operations in S927A in FIG. This makes the procedure complicated. As a result, the procedure becomes more complicated as the number of operations of the operation means required for setting according to the operation of the operation means is relatively increased. Therefore, the operation is related to the time value of the real-time clock 353 due to an erroneous operation. It is possible to further suppress erroneous setting of information.

  (8) The complicated setting procedure is relatively different in that the operation time for one operation means such as the operation for 10 seconds or more in S921C, the operation for 5 seconds or more in S923C, or the operation for 2 seconds or more in S927B is relatively It is that the procedure is complicated by having been defined for a long time. As a result, the procedure becomes more complicated as the operation time of one operation means required for setting according to the operation of the operation means is relatively increased. Therefore, the time value of the real-time clock 353 is caused by an erroneous operation. It is possible to further suppress erroneous setting of information related to.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the distance between the operation button 120 and the power switch 911 used when setting the operating days change is the distance between the effect switch 354 and the power switch 911 used when resetting the date and time. The distance between the effect switch 354 and the power switch 911 used when resetting the date and time is longer than the distance between the clear switch 912 and the power switch 911 used when setting the golden time. Therefore, the complicated setting procedure is that the procedure is complicated because the distance between the plurality of operation means necessary for setting according to the operation of the operation means is relatively long. is there. As a result, the procedure becomes more complicated as the distance between the plurality of operation means required for setting according to the operation of the operation means is relatively increased. Therefore, the time value of the real-time clock 353 is reduced due to an erroneous operation. It is possible to further suppress erroneous setting of related information. Here, “the distance is long” means not the length of a mere linear distance but the distance to which the hand is moved in order to perform an operation by a person who intends to execute the setting. For example, when the operating means are arranged on the front and back of the game board 6, it means the distance on the surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  (10) According to such a configuration, the item to be set is selected according to the operation of the operation button 120 as the first operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the player can The item to be set is determined according to the operation of the effect switch 354 as the second operation means provided at the position where it cannot be operated. Thus, even if it becomes possible to select the item to be set in response to the player operating the operation button 120 by mistake, the player can operate the effect switch 354 for determining the item to be set. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress erroneous setting of information related to the time value of the real-time clock 353 due to an erroneous operation.

  (11) According to such a configuration, for example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the operation power supplied from the backup power supply circuit 355 is stopped and stored in the backup RAM 356. Stored in the backup RAM 356 due to the disappearance of the information of the time selected as the time for executing the special demonstration display that has been performed and the disappearance of the information of the selected time for human reasons. Even if the information on the set time disappears, the information on the time set as the fixed time for executing the special demonstration display is always stored in the ROM 359, so that the real-time clock 353 is based on the information on the fixed time. Special demonstration for the date and time specified by the clock Down display, it is possible to always perform a predetermined effect such as variable display of decorative designs using almighty symbol.

  (12) As shown in FIG. 15, when the date / time command is input from the connector 801 in the production control microcomputer 100, as shown in S613 of FIG. Based on this, the time measured by the real time clock 353 is set to a new date and time. Thereby, in the main board 31 provided with the production control microcomputer 100, the time measurement value by the real-time clock 353 is newly added based on the input of the date / time command from the connector 801 which is an existing configuration to which the production control command is inputted. Since the time value set by the real time clock 353 is set to a new date and time such as the Japanese standard date and time, the configuration related to the main board 31 and the production control microcomputer 100 required for setting the date and time is set. There is no need to provide a special terminal, a special port, or the like, an existing configuration can be used, and the versatility of the configuration can be ensured. And since it becomes possible to arbitrarily set the time value by the real time clock 353 in this way, the time value by the real time clock 353 can be made more accurate. In a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in such a manner, when a predetermined performance is executed all at once as in the special demonstration display described above, the performance performed in each pachinko gaming machine 1 is accurately matched. Is possible. Further, based on detecting the power of the backup power supply circuit 355, it is determined whether or not the information of the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared, and as shown in S1001 to S1004 of FIG. When it is determined that the value information has disappeared, the information disappearance notification as shown in FIG. 34 notifies that the time value information has disappeared. Thus, by notifying that the time value information stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared, a special demonstration display such as a special demonstration display based on the time value information stored in the backup RAM 356 is provided. It can be easily known that the change is not normally performed, and it can be easily known that the power supply function of the backup power supply circuit 355 has deteriorated. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily repair and replace the backup power supply circuit 355 having a reduced power supply function.

  (13) As described in S601 of FIG. 20, based on determining whether or not the voltage of the backup power supply circuit 356 monitored by the power supply monitoring circuit 357 has decreased below a predetermined value, the voltage is stored in the backup RAM 356. It is determined whether or not the measured time value data of the real time clock 353 has disappeared, so whether or not the measured value data of the real time clock 353 stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared based on the power supplied to the backup RAM 356. Can be easily determined.

  (14) A special demonstration display is executed on condition that the demonstration display command is received and it is determined in S7604 of FIG. 41 that the current time is the special demonstration execution time. In this way, by providing a demonstration display of a special demonstration that is executed simultaneously on the gaming machine installation island 200 when the time value of the real-time clock 353 reaches the special demonstration execution time, the special demonstration display is executed. Based on the confirmation of the timing, it can be easily determined outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 whether or not the clocking of the real-time clock 353 is incorrect. Thereby, based on the determination result of whether or not the timekeeping value of the real-time clock 353 is out of order, it is possible to take measures to cope with the time-out of the real-time clock 353, such as setting the timekeeping value to a standard value. It becomes possible. Specifically, the time value of the real-time clock 353 is automatically set (adjusted) using the date / time data output device 300, or manually input using operation means such as the operation button 120 and the effect switch 354. One of the processes of setting (adjusting) the time measurement value of the real-time clock 353 can be taken. Thus, for example, when such special demonstration display is executed simultaneously in the pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in a row like the gaming machine installation island 200, the special demonstration display of these pachinko gaming machines 1 is started. Based on checking whether or not there is a deviation in timing, it can be determined whether or not there is an error in the date and time specified by the time count of the real-time clock 353. For example, during the business hours of the game hall When a special demonstration display is executed simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 on the gaming machine installation island 200 (for example, the above-described simultaneous performance set and executed as shown in FIG. 19C), It is possible to accurately match the effects performed on the gaming machine. Further, since the demonstration display is generally performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not there is an error in the date and time specified by the time value of the real time clock 353 without providing a special configuration. can do. In addition, by adopting a configuration that adjusts the time value of the real-time clock 353 based on the date / time command output from the date / time data output device 300 provided separately from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a radio clock, etc. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a device for adjusting the time value, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented from increasing.

  (15) As shown in S1744 to S1746 of FIG. 36, notification effect information provided in the backup RAM 356 that can specify the notification effect for notifying the notification content set according to the operation of the operation button 120 is provided. It is stored in the effect information storage area. Then, as shown in S911 in FIG. 52, S1904 in FIG. 53, and S1978 in FIG. 54, when the notification effect execution condition for executing the notification effect is satisfied, the notification effect information stored in the backup RAM 356 is used. Since the notification effect is executed, the notification effect for informing the set notification content can be executed at an appropriate timing. Also, as shown in S1755-S1757 of FIG. 36, the notification effect information stored in the backup RAM 356 is deleted when the current time stored in the backup RAM 356 becomes a predetermined notification content deletion time. Therefore, the set notification effect is automatically deleted as appropriate, and the work burden on the operator can be reduced. Therefore, various game effects using the date and time specified by the current time information stored in the backup RAM 356 can be made and the work load on the operator can be reduced. Further, since the notification effect information stored in the backup RAM 356 is erased based on the current time information stored in the backup RAM 356, the notification effect execution condition is not satisfied and the notification effect is not executed. However, the notification effect information stored in the backup RAM 356 can be deleted.

  (16) As shown in S1810, S1811, S1816, S1817 in FIG. 45 and S820 and S821 in FIG. 48, when the symbol change period is reached based on the date and time specified by the current time information stored in the backup RAM 356. The display mode of the variable display displayed on the variable display device 9 is changed. The display mode is changed by changing the identification information to an almighty symbol or a couple symbol that can be used as a plurality of types of identification information in at least one display column displayed on the variable display device, or adding dual-purpose identification information. As shown in S825 to S828 of FIG. 48, S1851 to S1859 of FIG. 50, and S1872 of FIG. 51, such changes or additions are made using the process data including the almighty symbol selected in S821 of FIG. Using the almighty symbol or the couple symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the variation display device 9 is executed. Accordingly, the types of jackpot display results that can be displayed on the variable display device 9 can be increased based on the date and time specified by the current time information stored in the backup RAM 356, and various types of real-time clocks 353 can be used. It is possible to produce a game effect and improve the interest of the player in the game.

  (17) As shown in S1810a and S1816a in FIG. 45, when it is determined that the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared, the change in the effect mode is performed based on the time value stored in the backup RAM 356. Since the change of the decorative design (change to the decorative design variation using the almighty design) is prohibited, the production mode is not changed based on the time value that disappears and becomes inaccurate. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort due to an error in the correspondence between the date and time and the change in the effect mode.

  (18) As shown in S605 of FIG. 20, when it is determined that the information of the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared, the time of the time value of the real-time clock 353 is set to a predetermined initial setting. It is initially set to 9:00:00 which is the default value. As described above, the default value of the initial setting value is set at a predetermined time before the game hall is opened, so that even if the information of the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 disappears, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. If the actual time is 9:00:00, which is the same as the default value of the initial setting value (or a time close to 9:00:00), the real time clock 353 The time value of the real-time clock 353 can be adjusted to the correct time so that the same time is counted.

  (19) As shown in S2772 to S2776 in FIG. 79 and S1801a, S1801b, S1801c, and S1801d in FIG. 80, the date and time before a predetermined period before the predetermined date and time when the effect mode (display mode) in the variable display device 9 is changed. In addition, a notice effect is provided as shown in FIG. 83 so that it can be specified that the effect mode is changed at the predetermined date and time. By performing such a notice effect, the player can know the change date of the effect mode in advance, so that the player can easily see the change of the effect mode. , The interest of the player can be improved.

  (20) As shown in S2750 to S2755 of FIG. 77, an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined as to whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started operation. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the setting work of the operation start date of the gaming machine as the initial setting work of the real time clock 353, so that the initial setting work of the timing means can be completed in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine. become.

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, when the time value of the real time clock 353 is set to a new date and time using the date and time data output device 300 as shown in FIG. The connector of signal lines L1 to L9 from the main board 31 is removed from the main board 31 and the connector of signal lines L11 to L19 from the date and time data output device 300 is attached. An example of sending a date / time command was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a parallel-type relay connector that can attach the connectors of the signal lines L11 to L19 from the date / time data output device 300 is provided in the middle of the path of the signal lines L1 to L9 ( For example, when the connectors of the signal lines L11 to L19 from the date / time data output device 300 are attached to the relay connector, the date / time command from the date / time data output device 300 is changed to the signal lines L11 to L11. You may comprise so that it may transmit to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control via the signal line L1-L9 via the connector for relay from L19. In this case, when the date / time command is transmitted from the date / time data output device 300, the presentation control command is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. With this configuration, the date / time command can be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 without removing the signal lines L1 to L9 from the main board 31.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, when the time for starting the special demonstration display is reached, even when the normal demonstration display is being performed, the special demonstration display is suddenly started (sudden display). Example). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the normal demonstration display is executed when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) before the time when the special demonstration display is started. When the normal demonstration display is being executed, control for prohibiting the execution of the normal demonstration display may be performed at the timing before the predetermined time. Further, even when the normal demonstration display is not executed, control for prohibiting the execution of the normal demonstration display may be performed at the timing before the predetermined time.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, an example is shown in which the clock management process (S707A) for managing the time value of the time clock 353 is executed at the timing of the timer interrupt. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the clock management process is performed when the date / time INT signal transmitted from the date / time data output device 300 is received in accordance with the date / time command, and the interrupt process is performed. It may be. In this way, the time from when the date / time command is transmitted until the time value of the real-time clock 353 is set to a new date / time can be shortened based on the date / time command. The deviation of the time measured value of the real time clock 353 can be further reduced.

  (5) In embodiment mentioned above, the example which performs a normal demonstration display and a special demonstration display as a demonstration display in the pachinko machine 1 was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a special demonstration display may be executed as the demonstration display.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect switch 354 is provided on the lamp driver board 35 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect switch 354 may be provided on another sub-board such as the effect control board 80 or the audio output board 70.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the data transfer controller 358 is provided as a means for transferring the time-measured value information of the real-time clock 353 to temporarily store it in the backup RAM 356 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time value information is transferred from the real time clock 353 to the backup RAM 356 without providing the data transfer controller 358 periodically in the real time clock 353 in the time value data storage area in the backup RAM 356. A function of designating an address and transferring the information of the time value at that time and a function of writing the information of the time value thus transferred to the designated address in the backup RAM 356 You may have it.

  (8) In the date / time data output device 300 shown in the above-described embodiment, the time value data can be automatically set to the date / time, but the time value (second, minute, hour, day, (Day, month, year) data may not be input. In that case, only the date data is output as the date command. Further, the date / time data output device 300 may be configured not to transmit data to be written to the backup RAM 356.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the voltage of the backup power supply circuit 356 is measured, and when the voltage falls below a predetermined value, it is determined that the information on the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on reading the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 and determining whether the time value is a predetermined value that can be determined that the real-time clock 353 has been reset to the initial value. Thus, it may be determined that the information of the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared. Such a determination may be made when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or may be made when a predetermined period (for example, a time of about 1 hour) has elapsed since the turning on of the power. In this case, the “predetermined value at which the real-time clock 353 can be determined to have been reset to the initial value” includes the year information value 00, the month value 00 month, and the day value 00 day. Or, the value of hour, minute, second within 00 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds (for example, within 1 minute, within 1 hour, etc.) (Except when the actual time is within a predetermined period from 00:00:00). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the information of the timekeeping value has disappeared based on the value of the timekeeping value stored in the backup RAM 356, before the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the backup power supply circuit is replaced with a new one, and when the backup power supply circuit is composed of a quick-chargeable rechargeable battery, the voltage of the backup power supply circuit rises immediately after the power is turned on, Even when it is difficult to determine whether or not the time value information has disappeared based on the voltage of the backup power supply circuit, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the time value information has disappeared. Further, based on the function of determining that the information of the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared based on the voltage of the backup power supply circuit 356, and what value the time value stored in the backup RAM 356 is. You may make it monitor whether the information of the time value memorize | stored in backup RAM356 using both the function which determines whether the information of the time value disappeared.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, when notifying that the clocked time information stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared (clock information disappearance alert), the duration of the alert is the time until the disappearance alert timer expires. Thus, a limited example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification that the time value information stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared is an automatic date and time adjustment using the date and time data output device 300 as described above for the real time clock 353, or Alternatively, the adjustment may be continued until the date and time is adjusted by manual input as described above. Further, the notification that the time count information stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared may be continued until the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. In addition, in the case where it is determined whether or not the time count information has disappeared based on the value of the time count value stored in the backup RAM 356 as described above, Notification may be performed.

  (11) The above-described symbol change using an almighty symbol or a couple symbol is not limited to an example of daily execution, and may be executed by specifying a day or day of the week, such as how many days of the month or what day of the week. Good. Further, it may be executed by designating the day or day of the week and the time, such as from what time of the day of the month to what time, and from what time of day of the week to what time of the week.

  (12) The fixed time data of the special demonstration display described above is not limited to the ROM 359 provided on the lamp driver board 35 but may be stored and used in the ROM 84 provided on the effect control board 80. Further, data of a default value of the time value (the above-mentioned 9:00:00) used when the time value information of the real-time clock 353 stored in the backup RAM 356 disappears is provided in the lamp driver board 35. Not only the ROM 359 but also the ROM 84 provided on the effect control board 80 may be used.

  (13) When the data stored in the backup RAM 356 has disappeared due to the power of the power supply monitoring circuit 357 having been reduced, the above-described various data is stored again in the backup RAM 356 and new data is set. A command for designating such various data may be transmitted from the data output device 300, and the various data may be stored again based on the command.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the number of working days can be increased and decreased in the working day change setting mode has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the working day change setting mode, the number of working days can be decreased, but control may be performed so that the number of working days cannot be increased. In such a case, when there is an effect that cannot be executed unless the condition that the number of working days is not less than the predetermined number of days is satisfied, it is prevented that such an effect is not executed illegally due to reasons such as the convenience of the game hall. be able to.

  (15) Setting procedure for setting the time value of the real-time clock 353 and setting the number of working days by changing the complexity of the setting procedure, such as changing the number of operating means to be operated at power-on The example which varied the complexity of the setting procedure for setting the setting procedure and the execution condition of production was shown. Examples of the complexity of the setting procedure that can be used when the complexity of the setting procedure is different include the following. The number of operation means that need to be operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is increased. The number of operations of the operation means necessary for displaying a screen (such as a date / time resetting screen) that can be set according to the operation of the operation means is increased. The time required for one operation of the operation means required to display a screen (such as a date resetting screen) that can be set according to the operation of the operation means is increased. An openable / closable cover member is provided on the operation means so that the operation can be performed only when the cover member is opened. Such a cover member is provided with a lock mechanism that locks the opening / closing operation (locks the opening / closing operation), and the operating member cannot be operated by opening the cover member unless the lock is released. The size of the operating means (for example, the size of the part touched by the operator) is reduced. The installation part of the operating means is provided at a position that is recessed from the peripheral part. The operating force (force applied by the operator) required when operating the operating means is strengthened (for example, the switch has a hard feeling of operation). As described above, as examples of complication of the setting procedure that can be used when the complexity of the setting procedure is different, any configuration and processing contents can be used as long as the setting procedure is complicated. Such a thing may be adopted. The complicated setting procedure may include at least one of the complicated setting procedures as described above. Further, as the complicated setting procedure, two or more setting procedures may be appropriately combined among the complicated setting procedures as described above.

  (16) The above-described embodiment includes the following configuration. Game control means (game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command (effect control command) for controlling the effect device, and the effect control transmitted from the game control means Production control means (production control microcomputer 100) for controlling the production device in a predetermined production mode based on a command, and command input means (connector 801 in FIG. 15) for inputting the production control command. The command input means can input a date / time command (date / time command) indicating the date / time (FIG. 17), and when the date / time command is input from the command input means, the production control means The date and time setting means for setting the time value by the time measuring means based on the date and time indicated by (S613 in FIG. 61) Further comprising.

  According to such a configuration, in the effect control means, the time value is set by the time measuring means based on the input of the date / time command from the command input means which is an existing structure in which the effect control command is input. With regard to the configuration related to the production control means necessary for setting the time measured value by the means, the existing configuration can be used, and the versatility of the configuration can be ensured.

  (17) The above-described embodiment includes the following configuration. The game control means executes execution condition establishment data (stored in a holding storage buffer) that indicates the number of times the execution condition for the variable display has been established, but the execution condition for the variable display has not yet been established. Further includes execution condition satisfaction data storage means (RAM 55) for storing the numerical value data stored, that is, the count value data of the start winning storage counter, and the effect control means displays the variation display of the identification information. Based on the fact that no execution condition establishment data is stored in the execution condition establishment data storage means (when the number of pending storages is “0”) (a demonstration display command has been received). Demonstration execution means (S7604 in FIG. 41) for executing a predetermined demonstration presentation (special demonstration display) 7606 to S7610 and S7654 to S7658 and S7661 to S7664 in FIG. 42, and the demonstration execution means includes a demonstration execution condition (special demonstration execution time) with a predetermined date and time specified by the timekeeping information of the timekeeping means. The demonstration effect is executed on the condition that (something) is satisfied (S7606 to S7610 are executed in Y in S7604 in FIG. 41).

  According to such a configuration, the demonstration effect is executed on condition that the timing result of the timing unit satisfies a predetermined demonstration execution condition. As described above, the demonstration means that is executed when it is determined that the timing result of the timing means satisfies the demonstration execution condition is provided, and the timing means is confirmed based on confirming the timing at which the demonstration effect is executed. It can be easily determined outside the gaming machine whether or not there is an error in the timing. As a result, it is possible to take measures to deal with the timing error of the time measuring means, such as setting the time measuring value based on the determination result of whether or not the time measuring result of the time measuring means is incorrect. As a result, for example, when such demonstration effects are executed simultaneously in a plurality of gaming machines arranged in a row like gaming machine installation islands, are there any deviations in the start timing of the demonstration effects of these gaming machines? Based on the confirmation of whether or not, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an error in the date and time specified by the timing of the timing means. For example, a plurality of gaming machines on the gaming machine installation island can When the effects are executed, the effects performed on the respective gaming machines can be accurately matched.

  (18) The above-described embodiment includes the following configuration. The production control means is supplied with notification content setting means (S1745 in FIG. 36) for setting notification contents to be notified to the player, and power for operation is supplied from the power supply means, and is set by the notification content setting means. Notification effect storage means (notification effect information storage area provided in the backup RAM 356) for storing the notification effect information capable of specifying the notification effect for informing the notified content, and a predetermined for executing the notification effect A notification effect execution means (S911 in FIG. 52, S1904 in FIG. 53, S1978 in FIG. 54) for executing a notification effect based on the notification effect information stored in the notification effect storage means when the notification effect execution condition is satisfied; The notification effect deletion that deletes the notification effect information stored in the notification effect storage means based on the date and time specified by the timing information of the time measuring means Further comprising a stage (S1755～S1757 in Figure 36).

  According to such a configuration, the notification effect information capable of specifying the notification effect for notifying the notification content set by the knowledge content setting means supplies power even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Stored in the notification effect storage means to which power for operation is supplied from the power supply means. And when a predetermined notification effect execution condition for executing the notification effect is established, the notification effect is executed based on the notification effect information stored in the notification effect storage means, so that the set notification content is notified. Can be executed at an appropriate timing. In addition, since the notification effect deleting means for deleting the notification effect information stored in the notification effect storage means is provided based on the date and time specified by the time information of the time measuring means, the set notification effect is automatically set. The work load on the setter can be reduced. Therefore, various game effects using the date and time specified by the timing information of the timing means can be made and the work burden on the setter can be reduced. In addition, since the notification effect information stored in the notification effect storage means is erased based on the date and time specified by the time information of the time measuring means, the notification effect execution condition is not satisfied and the notification effect is not executed. Even so, the notification effect information stored in the notification effect storage means can be deleted.

  (19) The above-described embodiment includes the following configuration. The effect control means specifies a date and time before a predetermined period that specifies a date and time before a predetermined period that is a date and time before the predetermined date and time determined by the date and time determination means as a date and time for changing the effect mode in the effect device. Means (S2772 in FIG. 79), a date and time determination means before a predetermined period (S2772 in FIG. 79) for determining whether or not the date and time specified by the timing information of the time measuring means is the date and time before the predetermined period, An effect mode in the effect device is changed to the predetermined date and time based on the fact that the date and time specified by the timing information of the time measuring means is determined to match the date and time before the predetermined period by the date and time determination means before the period. A notice means (S1801a, S1801b, S1801c, and S1801d in FIG. 84) for performing a notice effect (notice effect in FIG. 83) for notifying that it can be specified. Including the door.

  According to such a configuration, a notice effect that informs in an identifiable manner that the effect mode is changed at the predetermined date and time is performed at a date and time before a predetermined period before the predetermined date and time when the effect mode in the effect device is changed. It is. By performing such a notice effect, the player can know the change date of the effect mode in advance, so that the player can easily see the change of the effect mode. , The interest of the player can be improved.

  (20) The above-described embodiment includes the following configuration. The production control means is an operation start determination means (S2750 to S2755 in FIG. 77) for determining whether or not the gaming machine has started operation, and an operation start determined to have been started by the operation start determination means. Operation start date and time storage means (operation start date and time storage area provided in the backup RAM 356) for storing operation start date and time information (operation start date and time information) that can specify the date and time, and the operation start determination means Based on the effect control command (variation pattern command, fanfare designation command, ending designation command, other effect control command) transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine has started operation. Determination (S2752 in FIG. 77), the date and time determination means before the predetermined period are stored in the operation start date and time storage means. Based on the operation start time specified by the operation start date and time information, it determines that the date and time specified by the time information of the clock means is coincident with the predetermined period before the date and time (S2772 in FIG. 79).

  According to such a configuration, the determination as to whether or not the gaming machine has started operation is performed based on the effect control command transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means. Since it is not necessary to perform the setting work of the operation start date of the gaming machine, the initial setting work of the time measuring means can be completed in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

(21) In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is provided as a gaming machine that is provided with an effect device for effecting a game and that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a specific condition is established in the game. 1 was described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a gaming machine, for example, a variable display that performs a variable display of identification information such as symbols by setting the number of bets for one game based on inserting coins as a game medium. It is possible to start a game with variable display on the device, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, so that one game is completed and a predetermined prize can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device Slot machine (for example, instead of the ball lending switch 91, a lending switch operated when receiving a lending (lending) of coins based on the deduction from the remaining amount as a game value owned by the player is used) It may be a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine. In a gaming machine other than a pachinko gaming machine such as a slot machine, the portion provided with the above-described operation unit 120 can be visually recognized by the player and can be operated anywhere on the gaming machine. It may be provided in such a position. In such a slot machine, various setting screens, such as described above, are displayed on the variable display device for performing variable display of symbols. In such a slot machine, the operation unit 120 described above may be an existing operation unit in the slot machine, or may be a newly provided operation unit.

  (22) As shown in S2750 to S2755 of FIG. 77, an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined as to whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started operation. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the setting work of the operation start date of the gaming machine as the initial setting work of the real time clock 353, so that the initial setting work of the timing means can be completed in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine. become.

  (23) As described above, each of the fixed execution condition information stored in the golden time setting data area of the ROM 359 and the setting execution condition information stored in the golden time setting area of the backup RAM 356 is information on whether or not the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect such as a special demonstration display based on the information regarding the presence or absence of the execution of the effect.

  (24) As described above, each of the fixed execution condition information stored in the golden time setting data area of the ROM 359 and the setting execution condition information stored in the golden time setting area of the backup RAM 356 provides information on the type of the effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect such as a special demonstration display based on information related to the type of effect.

  (25) As described above, the fixed execution condition information stored in the golden time setting data area of the ROM 359 and the setting execution condition information stored in the golden time setting area of the backup RAM 356 are information related to the time at which the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect such as a special demonstration display based on the information about the time when the effect is executed.

  (26) The operation means includes a first operation means (operation button 120) provided at a position where the player can operate, and a second operation means (production effect) provided at a position where the player cannot operate. Setting item selection means (S507, S514 in FIG. 31, S547, S557 in FIG. 32, S583 in FIG. 33) for selecting the item to be set in accordance with the operation of the first operation means. In accordance with the operation of the second operating means, setting item determining means for determining the items to be set (S508, S509, S515, S516 in FIG. 31, S550, S551, S560, S561 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33). And S584, S585).

  According to such a configuration, the items to be set are selected according to the operation of the first operating means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the player is provided at a position where the player cannot operate. Since the item to be set is determined according to the operation of the second operation means, the item to be set can be selected by mistake when the player operates the first operation means. Even if it is possible, the operation of the second operation means for determining the items to be set by the player cannot be performed, so that erroneous setting of information related to the time value of the time measuring means is suppressed. be able to.

(27) The execution condition of the predetermined effect includes information on whether or not the effect is executed (the fixed execution condition information stored in the golden time setting data area of the ROM 359 and the golden time setting area of the backup RAM 356). Disclosure that each of the setting execution condition information includes information related to whether or not the performance is executed, fixed execution condition information stored in the almighty symbol setting data area of the ROM 359, and setting execution conditions stored in the almighty symbol setting area of the backup RAM 356 Disclosure that each piece of information includes information about the presence or absence of performance)
According to such a configuration, since the execution condition of the predetermined effect includes information regarding whether or not the effect is executed, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the information regarding whether or not the effect is executed.

  (28) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 9 Variable display apparatus, 25 Decoration lamp, 27 Speaker, 71 Pachinko machine, 120 Operation button, 912 Clear switch, 354 Effect switch, Game control microcomputer, 100 Effect control microcomputer, 353 Real time clock, 356 Backup RAM, 355 Backup power supply circuit, 357 power supply monitoring circuit, 359 ROM, 801 connector.

Claims (3)

A gaming machine that performs a game for performing variable display of identification information,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect device based on a command transmitted by the game control means,
The production control means includes
A real-time clock as a timekeeping means,
Display mode changing means for changing the display mode in the game effect when the data according to the timing of the timing unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
A notice effect execution means for executing a display aspect notice effect for notifying a change in the display form in the game effect by the display form change means,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the notice effect executing means executes the display mode notice effect at least when the variable display of the identification information is not executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notice effect executing means can execute the display mode notice effect according to a state of the game effect. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notice effect execution means executes the display form notice effect in a form in which a date and time when the display form is changed can be specified.

Images